Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
2014-200C (2)
Division 3 Technical Provisions (Structures) for the INDIAN RIVER COUNTY INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER at South County Regional Park JULY 25, 2014 prepared for INDIAN RIVER COUNTY VERO BEACH, FLORIDA 32960 CID BORRELLI + PARTNERS ARCHITECTURE PLANNING LANDSCAPE INTERIORS AAC /WO; 11 72u V.\SSAR S 1111 1 ORL ANDD. F1 ( RIF)A t_11 lla 1eI,-197.-I1Fi .1 3 113 :: 1a.-1 7.-118.13-11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 00 00 01 TITLE PAGE INDIAN RIVER COUNTY INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER OWNER INDIAN RIVER COUNTY VERO BEACH, FLORIDA 32960 ARCHITECT BORRELLI+PARTNERS 720 Vassar Street Orlando, FL 32804 CIVIL CONSULTANTS MASTELLER & MOLER, INC. 1655 27TH Street suite 2 Vero Beach, Florida 32960 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT BORRELLI+PARTNERS 720 Vassar Street Orlando, FL 32804 INTERIOR DESIGN BORRELLI+PARTNERS RAMSKI & COMPANY 720 Vassar Street Orlando, FL 32804 1235 Mt. Vernon Street Orlando, FL 32803 STRUCTURAL, MEP, FP TLC Engineering for Architecture 255 S Orange Ave Orlando, Horida 32801 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 — SUMMARY 01 32 00 — CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 33 00 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 40 00 — QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 56 39 — TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 77 00 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 10 — PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED) DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 05 10 — HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE MOISTURE VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE (MVRA) 03 30 00 — CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 40 00 — TILT -UP CONCRETE DIVISION 04 — MASONRY 04 73 10 — QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS DIVISION 05 — METALS 05 12 00 — STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 21 00 — STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 31 00 — STEEL DECKING DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITS 06 06 20 — DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE 06 06 40 —ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANELS 06 06 60 — PLASTIC FABRICATIONS TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANELS 06 10 00 — ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 16 00 — SHEATHING 06 26 14 — MINERAL PROFILE PANELING 06 41 16 — PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 42 19 — PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 06 65 10 — SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 13 — BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 13 26 — SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 21 00 — THERMAL INSULATION 07 41 13 — STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 46 45 — FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID RAINSCREEN SIDING 07 54 16 — ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 07 81 00 —APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 84 13 — PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 92 00 — JOINT SEALANTS 07 95 00 — EXPANSION CONTROL DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS Specifications Table of Contents Page -1 of 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 08 11 13 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 12 16 — INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08 33 13 — COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 35 13 — FOLDING DOORS 08 35 13.23 —ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 51 13 —ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 71 00 — DOOR HARDWARE 08 80 00 — GLAZING DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 09 22 16 — NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 09 29 00 — GYPSUM BOARD 09 30 00 — TILING 09 30 60 — FLOORING ADHESIVES 09 51 23 —ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 54 50 —ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 09 62 23 — BAMBOO FLOORING 09 64 66 — WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 65 00 — RESILIENT WALL BASE 09 65 19 — RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 67 23 — RESINOUS FLOORING 09 68 13 — TILE CARPETING 09 72 50 — DECORATIVE EPDXY FLOORING 09 84 33 — SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS 09 90 00 — INTERIOR, EXTERIOR AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTS AND COATINGS 09 91 13 — EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 — INTERIOR PAINITING 09 96 00 — HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 —VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 14 23 — PANEL SIGNAGE 10 21 13 — TOILET PARTITIONS 10 22 39 — FOLDING GLASS -PANEL PARTITIONS 10 28 00 — TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 44 13 — FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10 44 16 — FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 73 43 — TRANSPORTATION STOP SHELTERS DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT 11 52 13 — PROJECTION SCREENS 11 66 23 — GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11 66 24 — PROTECTIVE GYM FLOOR COVERS 11 66 53 — GYMNASIUM DIVIDERS DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 12 48 16 — ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES 12 66 13 — TELESCOPIC BLEACHERS 12 93 00 — SITE FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) Specifications Table of Contents Page - 2 of 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED) DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 13 — WET -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 22 05 00 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 19 — METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 — GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 — IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 00 — PLUMBING INSULATION 22 11 16 — DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 19 — DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALITIES 22 11 23 — DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 13 16 — SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 19 — SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALITIES 22 14 13 — STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 23 — STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALITIES 22 33 00 — ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 40 00 — PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 — MECHANICAL 23 05 13 — COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 14 — VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 23 05 17 — SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 19 — METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 — GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 29 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 — VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 — IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 — TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 — HVAC INSULATION 23 09 00 — INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 93 — SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 21 13 — HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 16 — HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALITIES 23 21 23 — HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 23 00 — REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 25 00 — HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 31 13 — METAL DUCTS 23 33 00 — AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 34 23 — HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 01 — HVLS HVAC FANS 23 34 02 — HVLS HVAC FANS 23 34 03 — HVLS HVAC FANS 23 36 00 —AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 37 13 — DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 64 23 — SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 23 73 13 — MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 82 16 — ELECTRIC -RESISTANT AIR COILS 23 82 19 — FAN COIL UNITS Specifications Table of Contents Page - 3 of 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 00 10 —TLC BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 19 — LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRIC POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 26 — GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 — RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43 — UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 44 — SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 26 05 53 — IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 22 00 — LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 24 13 — SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 16 — PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 — WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 — FUSES 26 28 16 — ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 29 13 — ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 43 13 — SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 26 51 00 — INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 — EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVIDION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 11 — DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK (NOT USED) DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVMENTS 32 18 16 — PROTECTIVE PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYNTHETIC GRASS 32 31 13 — CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 92 00 — TURF AND GRASSES 32 93 00 — PLANTS DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES (NOT USED) Specifications Table of Contents Page - 4 of 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS END OF TECHNICAL SPECIFCATIONS Specifications Table of Contents Page - 5 of 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. 6. Future work. 7. Purchase contracts. 8. Owner -furnished products. 9. Contractor -furnished, Owner -installed products. 10. Access to site. 11. Coordination with occupants. 12. Work restrictions. 13. Specification and drawing conventions. 14. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Indian River County Intergenerational Recreation Center. 1. Project Location: 1590 9th Street SW, Vero Beach, Florida 32962. B. Architect: Borrelli + Partners, Inc., 720 Vassar Street, Orlando, Florida 32804 C. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Civil Engineers: Masteller & Moler, Inc.. 2. Structural Engineers: TLC Engineering for Architecture. SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Engineers: TLC Engineering for Architecture. 4. Interior Design: Borrelli + Partners Inc. in Association with Ramski & Company. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. The project will consist of a dual -conjoined single story buildings; Intergenerational Recreation Center of approximately 24,100SF and a Multi -Activity Center Gymnasium of approximately 16,500SF. Both structures are classified as 2A Sprinklered and composed of tilt -up concrete panels with steel trusses and metal roofing deck, with fire proofing on any structure below 20'-0" elevation. The roofing system is standing seam, with rigid roofing insulation. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during constriction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. I . Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify the Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. L Notify the Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor -air intakes. E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project Site is not permitted. F. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and backround screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative. 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terns used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 011000-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: L Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to Owner. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. 3. Three (3) paper copies unless otherwise required by the Owner. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost -loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost -loaded activities. C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or updated) and date on label. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. H. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. L Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with the following requirements. Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, area separations, interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner -furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Uninterruptible services. c. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. d. Environmental control. 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. CONS fRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. 1. Building flush -out. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 6. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar -chart -type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity -on -node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource -loaded, time -scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. 2. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. Testing. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following fmal completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer -drawn, time -scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 5. Cost- and Resource -Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect. b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start -total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 15. Constrcution Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner and Architect within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner and Architect in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In -House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 01 78 10 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device -independent and display resolution -independent fixed -layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. The Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 1. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810. b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Construction Manager. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal. 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number[, numbered consecutively]. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter. E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-06100.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. I. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. P. Transmittal number[, numbered consecutively]. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site specifically established for Project and notify Architect that file have been posted. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit three full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return two submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PDF electronic file. F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01320 "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01290 "Payment Procedures." I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01400 "Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS T. Preconstruction Test' Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. W. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include List of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED -DESIGN SERVICES A. Perfonnance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated -Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality -assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality - assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by ArchitectRetain "Mockups" Paragraph below if Project requires mockups. Revise if any mockups are to be constructed at an off-site location. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify perfounance characteristics. 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of' multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade -specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER appropriate, for the context of requirements. before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS JULY 25, 2014 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision A. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality -Control Plan: For quality -assurance and quality -control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality -control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic -force -resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality -assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind -force -resisting system or a wind -resisting component listed in the wind -force - resisting system quality -assurance plan prepared by Architect. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality -control service. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY -CONTROL PLAN A. Quality -Control Plan, General: Submit quality -control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality -assurance and quality -control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality -Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality -assurance and quality -control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality -control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality -control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. 2. 3. Contractor -performed tests and inspections including subcontractor -performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor -elected tests and inspections. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." Owner -performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site -assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re -review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and re -inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by deductive Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality -control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perfoun quality -control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in pre -installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality - control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01700 "Execution Requirements." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary site fencing. 2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for removing existing trees and shrubs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape or the average of the smallest and largest diameters at 6 inches (150 mm) above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4 -inch (100 -mm) size; and 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for trees larger than 4 -inch (100 -mm) size. B. Plant -Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings. C. Tree -Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings. D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B Samples for Verification: For each type of the following: 1. Protection -Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made from full-size components. 2. Protection -Zone Signage: Full-size Samples of each size and text, ready for installation. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. 1. Species and size of tree. 2. Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each. 3. Reason for pruning. 4. Description of pruning to be performed. 5. Description of maintenance following pruning. D. Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm. E. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. F. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. G. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. 1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but not limited to, the following: a. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Enforcing requirements for protection zones. c. Field quality control. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials. 1. Obtain topsoil only from well -drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches (100 mm) deep or more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. B. Topsoil: Imported or manufactured topsoil complying with ASTM D 5268. C. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1. Type: Wood and bark chips. 2. Size Range: 3 inches (76 mm) maximum, 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum. 3. Color: Natural. D. Protection -Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Wood Protection -Zone Fencing: Constructed of two 2 -by -4 -inch (50 -by -100 -mm) horizontal rails, with 4 -by -4 -inch (100-by-100-mm)preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart, and lower rail set halfway between top rail and ground. a. Height: 4 feet (1.2 m). b. Lumber: Comply with requirements in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." 2. Gates: Single swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones; leaf width 36 inches (914 mm). E. Protection -Zone Signage: Shop -fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with non fading lettering. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation -control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree and plant protection. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Flag each tree trunk at 54 inches (1372 mm) above the ground. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C. Tree -Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree -protection zones and other areas indicated. 1. Apply 4 -inch (100 -mm) average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 mm). 3.3 TREE- AND PLANT -PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection -Zone Fencing: Install protection -zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation. 1. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. 2. Access Gates: Install; adjust to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Protection -Zone Signage: Install protection -zone signage in visibly prominent locations every 50 feet (15 m) on protection -zone fencing, but no fewer than four signs with each facing a different direction. C. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. E. Maintain protection -zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 1. Do not remove protection -zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone. 2. Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain root buffer so long as access is permitted. 3.4 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Section 310000 "Earthwork." B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction and as required for root pruning. D. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. 3.5 ROOT PRUNING A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as follows: 1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Cut Ends: Do not paint cut root ends. 3. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 4. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 5. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots flush with the edge of the protection zone, by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow -tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 3.6 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as follows: 1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. 2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) 3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. B. Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site. 3.7 REGRADING A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. B. Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist unless otherwise indicated. 1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. D. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches (50 mm) or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant -protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.9 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs. 2. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. 3. Perform repairs within 24 hours. 4. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by Architect. B. Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 66 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures 6 inches (150 mm) or smaller in caliper size. 2. Provide [replacement stock as per required calculation . a. Species: Species selected by Architect. 3. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Section 329300 "Plants." 3.10 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 01 56 39 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 01 56 39 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 7 7 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 78 10 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re -inspection: Request re -inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. c. Three paper copies. Architect will return two copies. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch (215 -by -280 -mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS -37, or if GS -37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. - General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 1. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. P. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned -out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 78 10 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one paper -copy set(s) of marked -up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and digital data files. 3) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 10 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked -up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record- keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 10 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked -up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 5. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 10 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 10 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 78 10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 10 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 030510 — HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE MOISTURE VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE (MVRA) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods and services referenced in or related to this Section shall also be bound by the Related Documents identified in Division 01 Section "Summary." 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. High Performance Concrete Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA) for all new concrete slabs including slab -on- grade and concrete beams. 2. High Performance Concrete Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA) for all new concrete tilt -up wall and cast -in-place structural systems B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for vapor retarder. 2. Division 09 Flooring Sections for flooring materials installed over concrete slabs that contain integral moisture vapor reduction admixture and for preparation requirements. 3. Division 09 Section "Water Vapor Emission Control System" for topical water vapor reduction system. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 5084: Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of Saturated Porous Materials Using a Flexible Wall Permeameter. 2. ASTM E 1643: Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 3. ASTM E 1745: Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 4. ASTM F 710: Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 5. ASTM C 494/C 494M -08a: Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete Type S. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data. B. Product test reports performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of products with specified requirements of moisture vapor transmission based on comprehensive testing of current products. C. Manufacturer's certificate certifying admixture provided meets or exceeds specified requirements. HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE MOISTURE 030510- 1 VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Sample life of the concrete warranty. E. Sample adhesion guarantee. F. Sample moisture letter. G. MSDS. H. Sheet Vapor Retarder product data submittal 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm with not less than ten (10) years' experience in the manufacture of the specified concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture, capable of providing test reports indicating compliance with specified performance requirements, and able to provide on-site technical representation should the need arise. Selected product must have certification of compliance with ASTM C494 /C494M testing protocols from an independent AASHTO approved laboratory. B. Pre -installation Conference. 1. Verify all are familiar with MVRA project specific quality control procedures, review concrete mix designs and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Each entity directly concerned with MVRA dosed concrete must attend in person or conference call and provide electronic review of documents, mix designs and procedures. Meeting minutes and a letter stating this requirement has been fulfilled shall be taken by the contractor then directed to the Architect for compliance, prior to any concrete fabrication or installation. Those required to participate or to review include but are not limited to: a. Contractor. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures, sampling and testing. c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor e. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture manufacturer. C. Ready Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." D. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture Collection Agent / Representative Qualifications 1. Personnel conducting field sampling on behalf of the MVRA manufacturer shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -1 or an equivalent certification program. E. Moisture Testing and Evaluation: Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be certified in the conduct of ASTM D5084 under the supervision of a licensed geotechnical engineer. The determination as to whether the concrete slab is prepared to receive flooring, coatings, roofing, etc. rests with the MVRA manufacturer. F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of concrete moisture vapor reducing admixture from the same manufacturer. G. ACI Publications: For slabs to receive moisture sensitive coatings or material, comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 302.2R-06, "Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture -Sensitive Flooring". HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE MOISTURE 030510- 2 VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver MVRA in manufacturer's original, undamaged containers. B. Store MVRA protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and in a temperature controlled area above 36 degrees. C. Do not allow product to freeze. Should product freeze, immediately contact the MVRA manufacturer for further instructions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA): 1. MVRA must be installed according to, and in compliance with, the manufacturer's published data sheet to include, but not limited to: a. Dosing instructions. b. Onsite representation and sampling requirements. c. Use of an ASTM E 1745 vapor retarder installed following ASTM E 1643 and ASTM F710 guidelines; elevated slabs to receive flooring do not require a vapor retarder d. The design and specifications for roof deck assemblies, to include but not limited to, the use of air barriers and/or vapor retarders is the sole responsibility of the design professional and is excluded from this warranty as are any costs incurred due to roofing overburden. 2. Manufacturer's Warranty: To include: a. Term: Life of the concrete. b. Repair and/or removal of failed flooring or roofing. c. Placement of a topical moisture remediation system. d. Replacement of flooring/roofing materials like original installed to include material and labor. 3. Adhesion Warranty: MVRA Manufacturer shall provide an adhesion warranty to match the term of the adhesive and/or primer manufacturer's material defect warranty upon MVRA manufacturer's acceptance of field bond test. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design "Barrier One High Performance Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture" manufactured by Barrier One, Inc..; 522 S. Hunt Club Blvd., #303, Apopka, Florida 32703; Contact Manufacturer's representative: P: 877.224.5850, F: 866.594.3490 or Email at: info@barrierone.com B. Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable, providing their products equal or exceed the quality specified and they can provide products of the type, function and testing required. 1. 1800 Super Admix; Moxie International 2. Vapor Lock 20/20; Specialty Products Group 3. Hycrete W1000; Hycrete 4. Admix C-2000; Xypex C. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this section, under provisions of Section 01 60 00, substitutions may be considered. Failure to provide a product that meets or exceeds the MVRA warranty requirements of Part I and the MVRA field quality control requirements of Part 3 will result in all subsequent testing and slab remediation costs being borne by the ready mix supplier. HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE MOISTURE 030510- 3 VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) for all interior slab (on ground and elevated) and structural roof deck construction shall be a non-toxic, liquid admixture that is free of all volatile organic compounds (VOC). It shall be specifically designed to have a natural chemical reaction with pre-existing elements inside the concrete to eliminate the route of moisture vapor emission through the slab by restricting the integral capillary system. Chemical reaction shall form a permanent barrier (capillary break) that is integral to the concrete, insoluble, and irremovable. 1. Hydraulic conductivity: Project specific maximum of 6.0 E-8 cm/s per ASTM D5084 2. Toxicity: None 3. Odor: None 4. Flammability: None 5. VOC levels: zero 6. Solvent: water 7. Freeze Temp: 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0° C)(store above 36° F (2.3° C)) 8. Acid resistance: Excellent 9. Hazardous vapors: None 10. Installation: All concrete 11. Capillary break: Calcium Silicate Hydrate 12. pH: 11.3 13. weight: 10.3 lbs/gal (net) 14. Integral biocide to inhibit growth of mold and bacteria 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745 compliant material, with a maximum permeance of 0.1 US Perms and a minimum thickness of 0.01". Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work may be manufactured by, but are not limited to, the following: a. Insulation Solutions, Inc. b. Meadows, W. R., Inc. c. Raven Industries Inc. d. Reef Industries, Inc. 2. It is the responsibility of the vapor retarder manufacturer to show compliance with the most current version of ASTM E1745. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the requirements of Division 03 Cast -in -Place Concrete, or other appropriate section, for concrete mixing, placing and curing. B. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643, ASTM F710, ACI 302.2R-06 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Add MVRA in accordance with manufacturer's printed data sheet instructions: For mix designs ranging from 0.42 to 0.52 w/cm, dose at 14 ounces per 100 pounds (414m1/45kg) of total cementitious materials. Remove an equal amount of water from the mix. Add separately from other admixtures at the tail end of the load. Mk designs below 0.42 and above 0.52 may require adjustment and consultation with MVRA manufacturer is required prior to their use. HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE MOISTURE 030510- 4 VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete with MVRA according to ASTM C 94/C 94M; furnish batch ticket information showing dosage of MVRA. 2. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Add the MVRA to where it makes direct contact with the ready mix and then rotate drum of batch truck on high for at least seven minutes prior to discharge. D. Freshening onsite with held back mix water is acceptable so long as the practice is in accordance with published ACI guidelines and does not exceed the original water to cementitious material ratio or instructions of the structural engineer. E. Use of water reducing admixtures is recommended to achieve slumps greater than 4" (102mm). F. Use of other admixtures in the same batch as MVRA is acceptable so long as each admixture is added separately. G. The inclusion of a shrink reducing admixture (SRA) is not acceptable H. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 3.2 CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot - weather protection during curing. B. Cure concrete slabs to receive moisture sensitive coatings according to ACI 302.2R-06, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure concrete containing MVRA for not less than 24 hours, longer if ambient conditions are hot, windy, and sunny or subject to periods of very low humidity. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, mechanically remove curing compound prior to the installation of final flooring material in accordance with ASTM F-710. a. Do not chemically remove. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: The manufacturer of the moisture vapor reduction admixture will, at their expense, engage qualified agencies to obtain project specific sample cylinders and independent certified laboratories for subsequent testing per ASTM D5084 and preparation of test reports. B. Testing of Containing MVRA: 1. The moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) manufacturer will perform all moisture testing in accordance with this specification and will issue project specific warranties and adhesion guarantees prior to installation of any slab finishes; no further field slab moisture nor pH testing shall be required. HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE MOISTURE 030510- 5 VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Failure to provide a product that meets or exceeds these requirements will result in all subsequent testing and slab, tilt -up wall and cast -in-place remediation or replacement costs being borne by the contractor. 2. A representative or agent of the moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA) manufacturer must be present at the jobsite during placement of all MVRA treated concrete. a. Do not proceed without this representative being present. b. A minimum of one business day notification is required. 3. Field testing technician shall, at the expense of the MVRA Manufacturer, procure at least one 4 inch (102 mm) cylinder from every day of placement of MVRA dosed concrete for the purpose of subsequent hydraulic conductivity/coefficient of permeability testing. 4. All cylinders shall be independently lab tested in accordance with ASTM D 5084 at the expense of the MVRA manufacturer. 5. Tilt -up wall panels are not to be erected into place until the cylinder samples have been tested for ASTM D5084 and approved by the MVRA Manufacturer according to specified limits in Section 6.a. 6. Test results must conform to specified limits. a. Should any cylinder from any day of placement deliver results in excess of 6.0 E-08 cm/sec, the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer shall procure, at their expense, a core (or cores) from that day of placement. This core (cores) shall be sent to an independent laboratory for hydraulic conductivity (coefficient or permeability) per ASTM D 5084. b. Should any core deliver results in excess of 6.0 E-08 cm/sec per ASTM D 5084, the concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer shall provide, at their expense, a topical moisture mitigation system for all slab areas not meeting the stated limit. c. Should any core deliver results in excess of 6.0 E-08 cm/sec per ASTM D 5084, in tilt -wall or cast -in-place structural system, that component will not be installed and is to be discarded. 7. Proceeding with placement of concrete dosed with the MVRA without the required representation will result in the contractor bearing the cost to core and ship appropriate material for testing per ASTM D 5084. 3.4 MVRA manufacturer will notify the architect, in writing, where dosed concrete failed to meet ASTM D5084 testing requirements. REPAIRS A. Make repairs to slab in accordance with Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" and as recommended by concrete moisture vapor reduction admixture manufacturer. END OF SECTION 030510 HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE MOISTURE 030510- 6 VAPOR REDUCING ADMIXTURE INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Slabs -on -grade. 3. Suspended slabs. 4. Concrete toppings. 5. Building frame members. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete. 2. Division 03 Section "Concrete Topping" for emery- and iron -aggregate concrete floor toppings. 3. Division 03 Section "High Performance Concrete Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA)" for all new concrete tilt -up walls, slabs on grade and concrete beams. 4. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 5. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 6. Division 32 Section "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast - furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal. E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. G. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form -release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Semirigid joint filler. 12. Joint -filler strips. 13. Repair materials. H. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI - certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI -certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." E. Mockups: Cast concrete slab -on -grade and formed -surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. for slab -on -grade and 100 sq. ft. for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. c. Concrete subcontractor. d. Special concrete finish subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint -filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor -retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B -B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B -B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass -fiber -reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. F. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy -coated reinforcement, use epoxy -coated or other dielectric -polymer -coated wire bar supports. 3. For zinc -coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric -polymer -coated wire bar supports. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/ll, gray Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. C. Set -Accelerating Corrosion -Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN -CI. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; EUCON BCN. d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI. e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI. D. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water -reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ChemMasters. b. Davis Colors. c. Dayton Superior Corporation. d. Hoover Color Corporation. e. Lambert Corporation. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS f. QC Construction Products. g. Rockwood Pigments NA, Inc. h. Scofield, L. M. Company. Solomon Colors, Inc. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD -C 513, with factory -installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Greenstreak. b. Williams Products, Inc. 2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. 3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered. Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber waterstops with factory -installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints; resistant to oils, solvents, and chemicals. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield TPE-Rubber. b. Vinylex Corp.; PetroStop. c. WESTEC Barrier Technologies, Inc.; 600 Series TPE-R. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered. C. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD -C 572, with factory -installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BoMetals, Inc. b. Greenstreak. c. Paul Murphy Plastics Company. d. Vinylex Corp. 2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. 3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered. D. Self -Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonite -free hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc.; Adeka Ultra Seal. b. Greenstreak; Hydrotite. c. Vinylex Corp.; Swellseal. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type -105. h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8 -inch sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor -Aid. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E -CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. I. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK -2120 TRI -FILM. r. Unitex; PRO -FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 1315. b. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB. d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX; LusterSeal WB 300. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion. g. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal. h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30. j. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30. k. Right Pointe; Right Sheen W1330. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E. m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: Types I and II, non -load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing, high -range water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion -inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on drawings at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As indicated on drawings. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated on drawings. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Slabs -on -Grade: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on drawings at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 Ib/cu. yd. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated on drawings. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6. Steel -Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written instructions, at a rate of 50 Ib/cu. yd. C. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 Ib/cu. yd. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated on drawings. 4. Retain one or more of first three subparagraphs below. Percentages in options in first two subparagraphs are default air contents required by ACI 301 for severe exposure. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent. Concrete Toppings: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 Ib/cu. yd. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated on drawings. 4. Retain one or more of first three subparagraphs below. Percentages in options in first two subparagraphs are default air contents required by ACI 301 for severe exposure. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent. E. Building Frame Members: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on drawings at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As indicated on drawings. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated on drawings. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.14 CONCRETE MIXING CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth -formed finished surfaces. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28 -day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement. C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. B. Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with fine -graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam -girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 6. Use epoxy -bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-13 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2, Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. 3.8 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Self -Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. G. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed finished as -cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout -Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one- half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin -film - finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs -on - g rade. c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs. d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24. 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10 -ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-16 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin -set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel -finished floor surfaces. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast -in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces. 3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture -retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.14 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 18 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 19 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 8. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 9. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory - cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 20 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. 12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION 033000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 21 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 034000 - TILT -UP CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies load-bearing, tilt -up concrete, including the following: 1. Monolithic panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for slab -on -grade closure strip and general concrete construction. 2. Division 03 Section "Architectural Concrete" for specially finished formed concrete. 3. Division 03 Section "High Performance Concrete Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA)" for all new concrete tilt -up walls. 4. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for embedded metal items and loose hardware. 5. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing receivers and reglets. 6. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings between tilt -up panels. 7. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for engineered fill and drainage fill under slab -on - grade closure strip. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Face -down Surface: Concealed surface of as -cast, tilt -up panel formed against the casting slab. B. Face -up Surface: Exposed upper surface of as -cast, tilt -up panel. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of tilt -up concrete units. Indicate panel locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, and details of steel embedments. Match panel identification designations on Shop Drawings with those on Contract Drawings. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Include steel reinforcement, detailing fabrication, bending, and placing. Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent -bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. 2. Include additional steel reinforcement to resist hoisting and erection stresses. 3. Include locations and details of hoisting points and lifting devices for handling and erection. 4. Include engineering analysis data of additional steel reinforcement and hoisting and erection details, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 5. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail cast -in inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories. D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Bondbreakers. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Inserts and embedments. F. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs a supervisor on Project who is an ACI - certified Tilt -up Supervisor. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I, according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI -certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI -certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. H. Mockups: Cast and erect tilt -up concrete panel mockups to demonstrate typical reveals, surface finishes, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockup panels in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. In presence of Architect, damage part of an exposed surface for each finish, color, and texture required, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repairs to match adjacent undamaged surfaces. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with tilt -up concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Tilt -up concrete subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection procedures; testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control; tilt -up concrete finishes and finishing; cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures; curing procedures; casting -slab construction, flatness and levelness, finish, and joint requirements; steel reinforcement installation; hoisting and erection plans; measurement of fabrication and erection tolerances; tilt -up concrete repair procedures; and tilt -up concrete protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS AND ACCESSORIES A. Forms: Metal, dressed lumber, or other approved materials that are nonreactive with concrete and that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended liquid -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface treatments of concrete. D. Reveal Strips: Metal, PVC, rubber, straight dressed wood, or plywood; with sides kerfed. E. Sealer: Penetrating, clear, polyurethane wood form sealer formulated to reduce absorption of bleedwater and prevent migration of set -retarding chemicals from wood or plywood. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn galvanized. C. Bar Supports: Manufactured according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" of plastic or CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or Class 2 stainless-steel wire. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33 or ASTM C 144, manufactured or natural sand, from same source for Project, free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.4 ADMIXTURES Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.5 BONDBREAKERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in this Article. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products listed in this Article. C. Solvent -Borne, Chemically Reactive Bondbreaker: Penetrating polymerized solution containing no oils, waxes, paraffins, or silicones, and compatible with casting -slab curing compound. 1. Burke by Edoco; Clean Lift 90 V.O.C. 2. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Conspec CST VOC. 3. Dayton/Richmond Concrete Accessories; Maxi Tilt. 4. Dayton Superior Coporation; Sure Lift (J-6). D. Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Bondbreaker: Dissipating polymerized solution containing no oils, waxes, paraffins, or silicones, and compatible with casting -slab curing compound. 1. Burke by Edoco; Super Bondbreaker V.O.C. 2. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Tilt-Eez VOC. E. Waterborne, Chemically Reactive Bondbreaker: Penetrating polymerized emulsion containing no oils, waxes, paraffins, or silicones, and compatible with casting -slab curing compound. 1. Burke by Edoco; Super Tilt Bondbreaker W.B. 2. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Conspec CST/WB. 3. Dayton/Richmond Concrete Accessories; Maxi Tilt E. 4. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure -Lift WB (J-5). 5. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Silcoseal 2000F. F. Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Bondbreaker: Dissipating polymerized emulsion containing no oils, waxes, paraffins, or silicones, and compatible with casting -slab curing compound. 1. Burke by Edoco; Super Bondbreaker W.B. 2. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Tilt-Eez WB. 3. Dayton/Richmond Concrete Accessories; Rich Tilt E. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.7 CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Loose Hardware: Materials for securing tilt -up concrete panels together and to supporting and adjacent construction are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." B. Carbon -Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A ; carbon -steel, hex -head bolts and studs; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. D. Unheaded Carbon -Steel Rods and Nuts: ASTM A 36/A 36M, threaded rods with ASTM A 563, nuts. E. Welded Headed Studs: AWS D1.1, Type B headed studs, and cold -finished, carbon -steel bars. F. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. G. Chord Bar Sleeves: Tubular sheathing, plastic or moisture -resistance -treated cardboard. H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. I. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating to steel connections by hot -dip process, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. 1. Zinc Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20. J. Shop -Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of steel connections, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3, and shop -apply primer according to SSPC-PA 1. Primer: MPI#79, "Alkyd Anti -Corrosive Metal Primer". 2.8 LIFTING INSERTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Furnish inserts, dowels, bolts, nuts, washers, and other items to be cast in panels for tilting and lifting. Manufacture inserts with feet of plastic, galvanized steel wire, plastic -tipped steel wire, or stainless -steel -tipped steel wire. B. Furnish brace anchors and other accessories to be cast in panels and in casting slab for attaching bracing. 1. Manufacture wall brace anchors and accessories with feet of galvanized steel wire, plastic -tipped steel wire, or stainless -steel -tipped steel wire. 2. Manufacture floor brace anchors that will not penetrate vapor retarder under slab -on - grade. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.9 BEARING PADS A. Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet; Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50 to 70, ASTM D 2240; and minimum tensile strength 2250 psi , ASTM D 412. 2.10 GROUT Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage -compensating agents, and plasticizing and water -reducing agents; complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. B. Patching Mortar: Dry -pack mix consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. 2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Proportion concrete mixture as follows 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch . 4. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete according to ACI 301 requirements. C. Limit water-soluble chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.14 CONCRETE MIXING Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS A. Construct and brace formwork so tilt -up concrete panels are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated. 1. Construct forms on slab -on -grade or on temporary casting slab, at Contractor's option. 2. Provide for openings, offsets, recesses, reveals, rustications, reglets, and blockouts. 3. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concreting. Coat form liner with form -release agent. B. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Use kerfed inserts, such as those forming reglets, rustications, and recesses, for easy removal. C. Set edge forms for panels to achieve required panel thickness Chamfer exposed corners and edges, unless otherwise indicated, using chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform, smooth lines and tight edge joints. E. Coat contact surfaces of wood forms and chamfers with sealer before placing reinforcement. 3.2 BONDBREAKERS A. Uniformly and continuously apply two coats of bondbreaker to casting -slab surfaces by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing steel reinforcement. Recoat areas subjected to moisture before drying. Maintain continuity of coating until concrete placement. After placing steel reinforcement, touch up or recoat worn or damaged areas with bondbreaker. Do not splash or coat steel reinforcement and inserts. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating and placing reinforcement. B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 1. Do not tack -weld crossing reinforcing bars. 2. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Accurately place and securely support embedded items, anchorages, inserts, cramps, retainers, bar chords and sleeves, and other items to be built into panels. Coordinate with other trades for installing cast -in items. 3.4 PANEL CASTING, GENERAL Comply with ACI 301 for handling, placing, and consolidating concrete. B. Maintain position of steel reinforcement, inserts, and anchors during concrete placement, consolidation, and finishing. C. Screed panel surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Use bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb panel surfaces before beginning finishing operations. D. Form chamfers at top edges of panel perimeters, openings, and similar locations not formed by chamfer strips, unless otherwise indicated. E. Surface Defects: Limit visible surface defects to those permitted by TCA's "Tilt -up Concrete Association's Guideline Specifications" for Grade A, Architectural panel surfaces. 3.5 CASTING TOLERANCES A. Cast tilt -up concrete panels without exceeding the following tolerances: 1. Height and Width of Panels: a. For Panels up to 20 Feet Tall: 1/4 inch wide. b. For Panels 20 to 30 Feet Tall: 3/8 inch wide. c. Each Additional 10 Feet in Excess of 30 Feet Tall: 1/8 inch wide. 2. Thickness: 3/16 inch. 3. Skew of Panel or Opening: Difference in length of diagonals of 1/8 inch per 72 inches with a maximum difference of 1/2 inch. 4. Openings Cast into Panel: a. Size of Opening: 1/4 inch. b. Location of Centerline of Opening: 1/4 inch. 5. Location and Placement of Embedded Items: a. Inserts, Bolts, and Pipe Sleeves: 3/8 inch. b. Lifting and Bracing Inserts: As required by manufacturer. c. Lateral Placement of Weld Plate Embedments: 1 inch. d. Tipping and Flushness of Weld Plate Embedments: 1/4 inch. 6. Deviation of Steel Reinforcement Cover: Maintain minimum cover required by ACI 301. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.6 FACE -UP FINISHES A. Float Finish: Consolidate surface of plastic concrete with power -driven floats or by hand floating. Restraighten and cut down high spots and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraighten until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3.7 FACE -DOWN FINISHES Smooth, As -Cast Finish: Cast panel to produce a surface free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs. Produce a surface appearance of uniform color and texture. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures according to ACI 301. 1. Apply evaporation retarder in hot, dry, or windy weather to protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after screeding and bull floating concrete, but before float finishing. B. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure by one or a combination of the following methods according to ACI 308.1: Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 ERECTION Use erection equipment with care to prevent damage to floor slabs and panels B. Lift, support, and erect panels only at designated lifting or supporting points indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Do not erect panels until 75 percent of 28 -day compressive strength of concrete has been verified. D. Do not erect panels until verified compressive strength of concrete exceeds 3000 psi. Install tilt -up concrete panels level, plumb, square, and true. Place panels on leveled grout - setting pads or shims in correct position. Maintain joint width of 1/2 inch between panels. Install tilt -up concrete panels with face -down surfaces exposed to exterior of building. F. Temporarily brace and support panels securely in position against loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to panels are secured. G. Anchor panels in place and, if indicated, to one another. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Weld steel connectors to steel supports and embedments indicated, complying with AWS D1.1. H. Solidly grout -fill gaps between foundation system and bottom of panels. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6, Verification of concrete strength before erection of tilt -up panels. C. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. 3.11 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install tilt -up concrete panels without exceeding the following erection tolerances: 1. Joint Width Variation (Exterior Face): Without decreasing or increasing more than 50 percent from specified joint width, maintain joint width as follows: a. For Panels up to 20 Feet Tall: 1/4 inch. b. Each Additional 10 Feet in Excess of 20 Feet Tall: 1/8 inch. 2. Joint Taper: Maximum 3/8 inch over length, but not greater than the following: a. For Panels up to 20 Feet Tall: 1/4 inch. b. Each Additional 10 Feet in Excess of 20 Feet Tall: 1/8 inch 3. Panel Alignment: a. Alignment of Horizontal and Vertical Joints: 1/4 inch. b. Offset in Exterior Face of Adjacent Panels: 1/4 inch. 3.12 FILLING AND REPAIRS A. Patch holes and voids left by erecting and bracing inserts on tilt -up panels and slabs -on -grade. Cut or chip edges of voids perpendicular to concrete surface. Fill blockouts where indicated. 1. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes, voids, and blockouts with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar of a stiff consistency before bonding agent has dried. 2. Finish surfaces of fills and repairs to Architect's approval, with materials of same colors and textures as finishes on surrounding surfaces. TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Repair damaged galvanized steel surfaces of connectors by cleaning and applying a coat of zinc repair paint. C. Repair damage to tilt -up panels and slabs -on -grade resulting from tilt -up work, as directed by Architect. D. Remove and replace tilt -up panels that do not comply with requirements in this Section. E. Demolish and remove temporary concrete casting slabs. END OF SECTION 034000 TILT -UP CONCRETE 034000 - 12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 047310 - QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following horizontal and trim quartz surface product types: 1. Countertops with undermount bowls 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data - 1. For each type of product indicated on drawings. B. Shop drawings: 1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components. a. Show the following: 1) Full-size details, edge details, attachments, etc. 2) Locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3) Locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, waste receptacle and other items installed in quartz surface. 4) Seam locations. C. Samples: 1. For each type of product indicated: a. Submit minimum 6 -inch by 6 -inch sample in specified color. b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of seaming techniques. c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. 2. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work. D. Product data: 1. Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements. QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 04731-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Fabricator/installer qualifications: 1. Provide copy of certification number. F. Manufacturer certificates: 1. Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements. G. Maintenance data. 1. Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data. a. Maintenance kit for finishes shall be submitted. 2. Include in project closeout documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator/installer qualifications: 1. Work of this section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, certified in writing by the manufacturer. C. Applicable standards: 1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein: a. American. National Standards Institute (ANSI) b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) d. NSF International 2. Fire test response characteristics: a. Provide with the following Class A (Class I) surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E 84) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. c. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Allowable tolerances: 1. Variation in component size: ±1/8" (3 mm) over a 10' length. 2. Location of openings: ±1/8" (3 mm) from indicated location. QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 04731-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Maximum 1/8" (3 mm) clearance between quartz surfaces and each wall. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. B. Store components indoors prior to installation. C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 10 -year warranty against defects in materials. 1. Warranty shall provide material to repair or replace defective materials. 2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be warranted. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance requirements as specified by the manufacturer. PART 2 —PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product: 1. Silestone quartz surface 2. Acceptable alternate manufacturers a. Zodiaq b. Cambria 2.2 MATERIALS A. Material: 1. Homogeneous quartz surfaces material. 2. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified. QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 04731-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Thickness: 1. 3 cm (1 1/8"). C. Edge treatment: 1. Square Edge D. Seam width: 1. <1/8" unless otherwise specified. E. Sink mounting: 1. Undermount. F. Backsplash: 1. Applied. G. Endsplash: 1. Applied. H. Performance characteristics: physical properties data sheet: 1. Physical characteristics: a. Static coefficient of friction: 0.75 dry, 0.68 wet, tested to ASTM C1028. b. Water absorption: 0.03 percent, tested to ASTM C97. c. Compressive strength: 29,100 psi, tested to ASTM C170. d. Bond strength: 235 psi, tested to ASTM C482. e. Modulus of rupture: 6310 psi, tested to ASTM C99. f. Flexural strength: 5840 psi, tested to ASTM C880. g. Breaking strength: 480 lbf, tested to ASTM C648 h. Impact strength: Minus 352 feet, tested to ASTM C256. Density: 2.47 grams per cubic centimeter, tested to ASTM C737. j. Stain resistance: Not affected by 10 percent hydrochloric acid or 10 percent KOH, tested to ASTM C560. k. Thermal shock resistance: Pass 5 cycles, tested to ASTM C484. 1. Abrasive index: 65-Ha=25, tested to ASTM C241. m. Thermal expansion: 1.670 x 10"5 in/in/deg F, tested to ASTM C531. n. Deicing resistance: Rating of 0, tested to ASTM C672/C672M. o. Freeze/thaw resistance: 0 tiles at 15 cycles, tested to ASTM C1026. p. Flame spread rating: Class 1, tested to ASTM E84. q. Flammability: Best rating, tested to UL 94. 2. Certifications: a. GEI indoor Air Quality Certified. b. GEI Children and Schools Certified. c. NSF/ANSI 51 Certified. QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 04731-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS d. Kosher Certified. Property Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus Flexural Elongation Compression Strength (Dry) Compression Strength (Wet) Hardness Thermal Expansion Gloss (60° Gardner) Colorfastness Wear and Cleanability Stain Resistance (stain 5.2, chemical 5.5, cigarette Fungal and Bacterial Resistance High Temperature Resistance (356°F) Boiling Water Resistance Freeze -Thaw Cycling Point Impact Ball Impact Slip Resistance Static Coefficient of Friction (as received) Static Coefficient of Friction (with renovator) Abrasion Resistance Specific Gravity Density Water Absorption Long- and Short -Term Moisture Expansion Toxicity Flammability UL 723 (Class I and Class A) Flame Spread Index Smoke Developed Index Nominal Thickness Nominal Weight 15 lb./ft.2 (3 cm) Typical Result >5,300 psi 5.3-5.7E6 psi >0.1 % —27,000 psi —24,000 psi 7 1.45 x 10-5 in./in./°C 45-50 Passes Passes Passes 5.4 resistances) No growth None to slight effect None to slight effect Unaffected Passes 164 inches Above 0.80 for textured models 0.89/0.61 (wet/dry) 0.87/0.65 (wet/dry) 139 2.44 —2400 kg/m3 0.12% <0.04% <0.01% on average Passes, LC50=68-128 For all colors tested and NFPA 255 FSI <10 for 3 cm and <15 for 2 cm SDI <50 for 3 cm and <100 for 2 cm 2 cm and 3 cm 10 lb./ft.2 (2 cm) * NEMA results based on the NEMA LD 3-2000 2.3 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS A. Joint adhesive: 1. Cosentino -approved adhesive to create color -matched seam. B. Sink/bowl mounting hardware: Test Procedure ASTM D 790 ASTM D 790 ASTM D 790 ASTM C 170 ASTM C 170 Mohs' Hardness Scale ASTM D 696 ANSI Z 124 ANSI Z 124.6.5.1 ANSI Z 124.6.5.3 ANSI Z 124.6 ASTM G 21 & G 22 NEMA LD 3.3.6* NEMA LD 3.3.5* ASTM C 1026 ANSI Z 124.6.4.2 NEMA LD 3.3.8* ASTM C 1028 ASTM C 1028 ASTM C 1028 ASTM C 501 ASTM D 792 ASTM C 373 ASTM D 570 ASTM C 370 Pittsburgh Protocol ASTM E 84, QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 04731-5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturer's approved bowl clips, brass inserts and fasteners for attachment of undermount sinks/bowls. 2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION A. Shop assembly 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions and technical bulletins. 2. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive joints. a. Reinforce as required. 3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings. 4. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Smooth edges. 2.5 FINISHES A. Select from the manufacturer's standard color chart. 1. Color: As indicated on drawings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product installation details. 1. Tops: a. Flat and true to within 1/8" (3 mm) of a flat surface over a 10' length. b. Allow a minimum of 1/16" to a maximum of 1/8" (3 mm) clearance between surface and each wall. B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joint widths no greater than 1/8" (3 mm) in finished work. 1. Keep components and hands clean when making joints. QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 04731-6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Sinks: 1. Adhere undermount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturer's recommended adhesive and mounting hardware. D. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. 1. Adhere to countertops using manufacturer's standard color -matched silicone sealant. E. Keep components and hands clean during installation. 1. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. 2. Components shall be clean on date of substantial completion. F. Connections: 1. Make plumbing connections in accordance with Division 15. 2 Make electrical connections in accordance with Division 16. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep components clean during installation. 1. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. B. Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. 1. Replace damaged work. END OF SECTION 04731 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 04731-7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 05 Section "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel. 3. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 4. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural -steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 5. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs." 6. Division 09 painting Sections for surface -preparation and priming requirements. 7. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Seismic -Load -Resisting System: Elements of structural -steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections. C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows: 1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches. 2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches. 3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches. D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic -Load -Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering design by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use ASD; data are given at service -load level. B. Moment Connections: Type PR, partially restrained. C. Construction: Combined system of moment frame, braced frame, and shear walls. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members and connections of the seismic -load -resisting system. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds. 8. For structural -steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural design data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, professional engineer, testing agency. D. Welding certificates. E. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. F. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. G. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct -tension indicators. 3. Tension -control, high-strength bolt -nut -washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5. Shop primers. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE. C. Shop -Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P3 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom -flange, demand -critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W -Shapes: As indicated on drawings. B. Channels, Angles, M, S -Shapes: As indicated on drawings. C. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible -washer type with plain finish. B. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts or tension -control, bolt -nut -washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers with plain finish. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible -washer type with plain finish. C. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy - hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy -hex carbon - steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold -finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. E. Headed Anchor Rods: As indicated on drawings.. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy -hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold -finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035. G. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold -finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Division 09 painting Sections. B. Primer in first paragraph below requires SSPC-SP 2 surface preparation or better and 24 hours' drying before recoating. Type II has lower VOC content than Type I. C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. E. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop - priming operations. B. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. C. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. D. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1:1M and manufacturer's written instructions. E. Steel Wall -Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall - opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. F. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug -weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials (applied fireproofing). B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NAGE No. 4, "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. PART 3 - EXECUTION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast -in- place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field -welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less -than -continuous 360 -degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power -tool cleaning. END OF SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. K -series steel joists. 2. KCS -type K -series steel joists. 3. K -series steel joist substitutes. 4. Long -span steel joists. 5. Joist girders. 6. Joist accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SJI "Specifications" : Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated. B. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the following: Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and; and attachments to other construction. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with requirements. E. Mill Certificates: Signed by bolt manufacturers certifying that bolts comply with requirements. F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and professional engineer. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For joists. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications." 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel -angle chord members. B. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon -steel, hex -head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. C. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. 2.2 PRIMERS A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.3 K -SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: K -series steel joists and KCS -type K -series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle or -channel members. C. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. E. Top -Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top -chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." F. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." G. Do not camber joists. H. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.4 LONG -SPAN STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH - Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members; of joist type and end and top -chord arrangements as indicated. B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. D. Camber long -span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications." E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.5 JOIST GIRDERS A. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members; with end and top -chord arrangements as indicated. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joist girders. D. Camber joist girders according to SJI's "Specifications." E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. - 2.6 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom -chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. C. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. 2.7 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. B. Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick. C. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Division 09 painting Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom -chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads have been applied. C. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon -steel bolts. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high- strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. B. Bolted connections will be visually inspected. C. High-strength, field -bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts." D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements. E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists abutting structural steel, and accessories. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100-6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. 2. Acoustical roof deck. 3. Composite floor deck. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete fill. 2. Division 03 Section "Lightweight Insulating Concrete" for lightweight insulating concrete fill. 3. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field -welded shear connectors. 4. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 5. Division 09 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck. 6. Division 26 Section "Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems" for preset inserts, activation kits, afterset inserts, service fittings, header ducts, and trench header ducts used with cellular floor -deck systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. D. Welding certificates. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1. Power -actuated mechanical fasteners. 2. Acoustical roof deck. STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." D. FMG Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FMG and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1.6 COORDINATION Coordinate installation of sound -absorbing insulation strips in topside ribs of acoustical deck with roofing installation- specified in Division 07 Section "<lnsert title of applicable roofing Section>" to ensure protection of insulation strips against damage from effects of weather and other causes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Deck: a. ASC Profiles, Inc. b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. c. Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. DACS, Inc. e. D -Mac Industries Inc. f. Epic Metals Corporation. g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. j. Roof Deck, Inc. k. United Steel Deck, Inc. I. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. m. Verco Manufacturing Co. STEEL DECKING 053100 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade G90 zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low-velocity, power -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359 -inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z -Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. G. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck. H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch thick, with factory - punched hole of 3/8 -inch minimum diameter. I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD -P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. STEEL DECKING 053100 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ROOF -DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum. D. Miscellaneous Roof -Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, .finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof -deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. STEEL DECKING 053100 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. F. Sound -Absorbing Insulation: Installation into topside ribs of deck as specified in Division 07 Section "<Insert title of applicable roofing Section>." 3.4 FLOOR -DECK INSTALLATION Fasten floor -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart. 3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. 4. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Butted. D. Floor -Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z -closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight -fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. E. Install piercing hanger tabs at 12 inches apart in both directions, within 9 inches of walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION STEEL DECKING 053100 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 053100 STEEL DECKING 053100 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 060620 -DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Standard Decorative Laminates. B. Custom Decorative Laminates. C. Adhesives. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 06: Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Interior Architectural Woodwork, Finish Carpentry, Architectural Wood Casework, Wood Paneling, Adhesives). B. Division 10: Interior Specialties (Wall Paneling). 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: In addition to requirements, comply with applicable provisions of following for design, materials, fabrication and installation of component parts: 1. NEMA LD3 - National Electrical Manufacturer Association. 2. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ASTM E162 - Surface Flammability and 662 Rate of Smoke Generation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000. B. Product Data: 1. Submit product data, including manufacturer's technical data sheet for specified products, including literature for high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, and substrate information as related. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including edge conditions, panel joints, accessories, designs and textures. D. Samples: DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE 060620-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Submit selection and verification samples for product type, designs and textures. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties, if required. 2. Manufacturer's technical data sheets for laminate and adhesives. 3. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 4. Certifications: a. Recycled Content. b. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC). c. VOC compliance with local jurisdictions. F. Maintenance: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's Care and Maintenance Guide. 1.5 REGULARY REQUIREMENTS A. Adhesives: 1. SCAQMD (South Coast Air Quality Management District). 2. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) model Rule for Adhesives and Sealants. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer producing product in ISO 9001 certified facility. 2. Fabricator/Installer must be experienced in performing work of similar type and scope. B. Mock -Ups: 1. Install at project site using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Architect's acceptance of finish color, texture, pattern, fabrication, and installation standards. Comply with Division 01 Quality Control (Mock -Up Requirements) Section. 2. Mock -Up Size: 12'x 12' 3. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for fabrication and installation comparison. If required, remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required. 4. Incorporation: If allowed, mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Architect's approval. DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE 060620-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements Sections. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. B. Adhesive: For best results, do not apply adhesives at temperatures below 65°F. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. As indicated on finish material list. 2.2 STANDARD DECORATIVE LAMINATES A. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers: Formica, Pionite B. Decorative surface papers, impregnated with melamine resins, bonded under heat and pressure to kraft papers impregnated with phenolic resins. C. General Purpose Type: Wilsonart Type 107, having the following physical characteristics: 1. Sheet thickness: 0.048 inch nominal (1.22mm). 2. Exceeding performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 current revision, Grade HGS. 3. Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84; unbonded. 4. Patterns and Finishes: Indicated on drawings in Finish Material List D. Vertical Surface Type: Wilsonart Type 335, having the following physical characteristics: 1. Sheet thickness: 0.028 inch nominal (0.71 mm). 2. Exceeding performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 current revision, Grade VGS and VGP. 3. Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84; unbonded. 4. Patterns and Finishes: Indicated on drawings. E. Postforming Type: Wilsonart Type 350, having the following physical characteristics: 1. Sheet thickness: 0.039 inch nominal (1.00 mm). 2. Exceeding performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 current revision, Grade HGP. 3. Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E 84; unbonded. 4. Patterns and Finishes: Indicated on drawings. DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE 060620-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Contact Adhesive: 1. Non-postforming: a. Wilsonart® 1730/1731 Low VOC Contact Adhesive. b. Wilsonart® 730/731 Contact Adhesive, Low VOC canister. 2. Postforming: a. Wilsonart® H2O Contact Adhesive, water-based. b. Water-resistant, non -staining bond for common high pressure laminate (HPL) applications. B. Cold Press PVA Adhesives 1. Wilsonart® 3100 PVA Adhesive: For bonding decorative laminate to wood products. 2. Wilsonart® 3105 PVA Adhesive: High solids, for bonding decorative laminate to wood products. 3. Wilsonart® 3116 PVA Adhesive: For bonding decorative laminate to wood products and bonding paper -backed products. C. Hot Press PVA Adhesives 1. Wilsonart® 3131 PVA Adhesive: High solids for bonding decorative laminates to wood products. 2. Wilsonart® 3132 PVA Adhesive: High solids for bonding decorative laminates to wood products. 2.12 ADHESIVE APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. Manual Spray: 1. Binks 2. Devilbiss B. Automatic Spray: 1. Binks 2. Devilbiss PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces for conditions that would adversely affect the performance of the decorative or edge performance. DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE 060620-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Surfaces to be adhesively bonded should be clean, dry and free of any dust, loose paint, wax, moisture, dirt, grease, oil, rust, or other contaminants. 3.2 PREPARATION Surface preparation: Precondition surfacing materials and surfaces to receive surfacing materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Allow substrates to acclimate to room temperature for 48 hours before bonding. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with AWS (Architect Woodwork Standards) and requirements of Section 06 4100, Architectural Woodwork. 3.4 SPRAY APPLICATIONS A. Comply with adhesive manufacturers printed installation instructions. B. Apply adhesive uniformly to both surfaces and cover each surface a minimum of 80%. C. Apply two coats of adhesive to porous surfaces. 100% coverage is recommended for edges. D. Apply uniform downward pressure (30-40 psi minimum) across the entire bonded surface. 3.5 BRUSH APPLICATIONS A. Comply with adhesive manufacturers printed installation instructions. B. Apply adhesive with a brush or solvent -resistant medium nap roller. Apply adhesive uniformly to both surfaces and cover each surface 100%. C. Provide two coats of adhesive on porous surfaces. Double coat edges. Guide Specification 120312 Section 06 0620 Decorative Plastic Laminate D. Apply uniform downward pressure (30-40 psi minimum) across the entire bonded surface. 3.6 HAND APPLICATIONS A. Comply with adhesive manufacturers printed installation instructions 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean decorative plastic laminate in accordance with manufacturer's care and maintenance instructions. DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE 060620-5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 060620 DECORATIVE PLASTIC LAMINATE 060620-6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 060640 - ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANELS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following type of' wall panel: 1. Screens pattern number: 276.251.5300 1.02 REFERENCES A. National codes (IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA and Life Safety) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) D. USGBC/LEED's E. CARE ATCM Phase 2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 specification section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures". B. Product data and detailed specifications for each system component and installation accessory required, including installation methods. C. Shop drawings showing locations, seam locations, placement of "in -wall blocking" and or plywood skinned walls, pattern orientation, installation method, comer conditions and installation details of wall panel products. D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit the following samples, as proposed for this work, for verification of color, texture, pattern and thickness: 1. Sample of each product specified. E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of each component with requirements indicated. ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANELS 060640-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Maintenance data for wall system components for inclusion in the operating and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer qualifications: Engage an installer who has no less than 3 years experience in installation of wall panels similar in complexity to those required for this project. B. Product quality standard: To comply with AWI section 500 for flush fitting wood paneling. Quality grade to be premium. C. Code compliance: Assemblies should conform to all applicable codes including IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA and Life Safety. D. Fire performance characteristics: Provide wall panels fabricated from fire rated materials tested in accordance with ASTM -E84 (CAN/ULC S102.2) for Class 1 characteristics listed below: 1. Flame spread 25 or less 2. Smoke developed: 150 or less 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Immediately upon delivery, contractor must open crate and inspect goods prior to signing the bill of lading. This must occur regardless of any visible signs of extemal damage to the crating material. "Hidden" damage due to stacking of freight or mishandling the crate during the shipping process may occur. This is "Freight Damage" and not the responsibility of Interlam. If damage is found, contractor MUST sign for the freight as damaged and the driver must acknowledge that the contractor is signing for damaged freight. It is the responsibility of the contractor to file any and all freight claims resulting from this process. Interlam has no liability after the goods are shipped from Seller's address. Store materials in original, undamaged packaging in a clean, dry place out of direct sunlight and exposure to the elements. A room temperature of 40-100°F (4-38°C) should be maintained. B. Materials must be stored flat. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65-75°F (18-24°C) with maintained relative humidity levels of 25-55% for at least 48 hours prior to beginning the installation. B. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before installation commences. ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANELS 060640-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Interior wall panel product specified herein and installed on the submittal drawings shall be manufactured by: Interlam, Corp., 391 Hickory Street, Mount Airy, NC 2703; (P) 336-786-6254 (F) 336-786- 9460 www.interlam-design.com 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wall Panels to be pattern: Screen Circles # 276.251.5300 1" thick: 1. Interlam Art Diffusion Wall Panel to be Flakeboard FR 1" thick 48" x 96" fibre core panel 2. Finish: Product shall be primed and sanded from manufacturer. 2.03 WALL PANEL MOUNTING: A. Panel to be mounted directly to drywall using PL Premium Polyurethane adhesive (www.stickwithpl.com) AND face screwed into studs or blocking. Screw holes should be filled with an automotive body filler such as bondo and the seams should be filled with a flexible seam filler that is compatible with the top coat. The seams should be allowed to dry and flush sanded prior to shop applied top coat. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wall panels to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and sizes. All based upon required field verified dimensions. 2.05 FINISHES A. Seal backs and edges prior to finishing faces. B. Top Coat: 2 coat powder coat system. 1. Color: Match (PT -12) as specified on drawings. 2. Texture: Ultra Fine 3. Sheen: High Gloss ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANELS 060640-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. B. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the required field verified dimensions. B. Temperature at the time of installation must be between 65-75°F (18-24°C) and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation to allow for proper adhesive set up. C. Relative humidity should be maintained within the range of 25-55%. 3.04 CLEANING A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean wall panels and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommended cleaning method. B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of work. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains. END OF SECTION 060640 ARCHITECTURAL WALL PANELS 060640-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 06 06 60 - Plastic Fabrications Translucent Resin Panel System PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the Plastic Fabrication as shown and specified in the described system(s): 1. Millwork B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contact and Division 1 specifi- cation section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures". B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data; include product description, fabrication in- formation, and compliance with specified performance requirements: C. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent 3rd party testing agency indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project. 1. Test reports required are: a. Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635) b. Self -Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929) c. Density of Smoke (ASTM D 2843) d. Flame spread and Smoke developed testing (ASTM E 84) e. Room Corner Burn Test (NEPA 286) f. Extent of Burning (UL 94) g. Impact strength (ASTM D 3763) h. Safety glazing impact resistance (ANSI Z97.1-2004) i. UPITT Test for Combustion Product Toxicity j. Dynamic environmental testing (ASTM standards D 5116 and D 6670) D. Building Approvals: Plastic Fabrications are to have been evaluated and must be registered with and comply to requirements of the following jurisdictions: 1. New York Department of Buildings (Product must have an MEA [Materials and Equip- ment Acceptance] number) for use as Interior Finishes 2. Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety (Product must have a LARR [Los Ange- les Research Report] number) for use as Light -transmitting Panels E. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, panel dimensions, details, and attachments to other work. PLASTIC FABRICATIONS TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL 06 06 60 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Submit (6) minimum 2 -inch by 2 -inch samples. Indicate full color, texture and pattern variation. G. Samples for Verification: 1. Submit (1) minimum 4 -inch by 4 -inch sample for each type, texture, pattern and color of solid plastic fabrication. H. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including care, repair and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers Qualifications 1. Materials and systems shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least five (5) con- secutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three (3) of the projects shall have been successful for use five (5) years or longer. 2. Manufactured panels must be produced from a minimum of 40% post-industrial recycle content. This recycle content must be certified by a recognized 31''d party certification group, such as Scientific Certification Systems (SCS). 3. Manufacturer must offer a documented reclaim process that will take back, at the manu- facturers cost, panels that are at their end -of life cycle. Return process is preceded by fol- lowing requirements highlighted in Section 02 42 00 Removal and Salvage of Construc- tion Materials. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver Plastic Fabrications, systems and specified items in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Do not deliver Plastic Fabrications, system, components and accessories to Project site until ar- eas are ready for installation. C. Store materials in a flat orientation in a dry place that is not exposed to exterior elements. D. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to pre- vent damage or staining following installation for duration of project. E. Before installing Plastic Fabrications, permit them to reach room temperature. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install Solid Polymer Fabrications until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, and ambient temperatures and humidity conditions are maintained at the lev- els indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.7 Warranty A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Plastic Fabrications: Manufacturer's standard form agree- ing to repair or replace units that fail in material or workmanship within the specified warranty period. PLASTIC FABRICATIONS TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL 06 06 60 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Warranty Period: 1 year after the date of substantial completion. C. The warranty shall not deprive the owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide : 3form, Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah, USA / telephone 801-649-2500 or comparable product. B. Lumicor — Decor C. Chrysalis — FID Collection 2.2 Materials A. VariaTM produced from ecoresinTM Sheet 1. Engineered polyester resin 2. Sheet Size: Maximum 4' x 10' 3. Thickness: Minimum 1/16" 4. Basis of Design Product: The design of Plastic Fabrications is based on VariaTM pro- duced with ecoresinTM as provided by 3form, Inc. Products from other manufacturers must be approved by the Architect or Designer prior to bidding in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and Section 10 60 00 "Product Requirements". B. Interlayer Materials: Compatible with polyesters and bonding process to create a monolithic sheet of material when complete. C. Sheet minimum performance attributes: 1. Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635). Material must attain CC 1 Rating for a nominal thick- ness of 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) and greater. 2. Self -Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929). Material must have a Self -ignition tempera- ture greater than 650°F. 3. Density of Smoke (ASTM D 2843). Material must have a smoke density less than 75%. 4. Flame spread and Smoke developed testing (ASTM E 84). Material must be able to meet a level of Class A (Flame spread less than 25 and smoke less than 450) at thickness of 1". 5. Room Corner Burn Test (NEPA 286). Material must meet Class A criteria at 1/4" thick- ness as described by the 2003 International Building Code. 6. Extent of Burning (UL 94). Must submit UL card. 7. Impact strength. Minimum impact strength test as measured by ASTM D 3763 of 20 ft. lbs. (for durability, shipping, installation, and use). 8. Safety Glazing. Material must attain a Class A impact rating in accordance with ANSI Z97.1-2004 at 1/8" thickness. 9. UPITT Test for Combustion Product Toxicity: Product must be recorded as "not more toxic than wood". 10. Dynamic environmental testing (ASTM standards D 5116 and D 6670). Panels must not have detectable VOC off -gassing agents and must be have GreenguardTM Indoor Air Quality certified. PLASTIC FABRICATIONS TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL 06 06 60 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 11. Panels must be produced from a minimum of 40% post-industrial recycle content. This recycle content must be certified by a recognized 3`d party certification group, such as Scientific Certification Systems (SCS). 12. Building Approvals: Plastic Fabrications are to have been evaluated and must be regis- tered with and comply to requirements of the following jurisdictions: a. New York Depailment of Buildings (Product must have an MEA [Materials and Equipment Acceptance] number) for use as Interior Finishes b. Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety (Product must have a LARR [Los Angeles Research Report] number) for use as Light -transmitting Panels 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate Plastic Fabrications to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to com- ply with indicated standards. Sizes, profiles and other characteristics are indicated on the draw- ings. B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for fabrication. C. Machining: Acceptable means of machining are listed below. Ensure that material is not chipped or warped by machining operations. 1. Sawing: Select equipment and blades suitable for type of cut required. 2. Drilling: Drills specifically designed for use with plastic products. 3. Milling: Climb cut where possible. 4. Routing 5. Tapping D. Forming: Form products to shapes indicated using the appropriate method listed below. Com- ply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Cold Bending 2. Hot Bending 3. Thermoforming: Acceptable only on uncoated material. 4. Drape Forming 5. Matched Mold Forming 6. Mechanical Forming E. Laminating: Laminate to substrates indicated using adhesives and techniques recommended by manufacturer. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape required for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaner: Type recommended by manufacturer. C. Fasteners: Use screws designed specifically for plastics. Self -threading screws are acceptable for permanent installations. Provide threaded metal inserts for applications requiring frequent disassembly such as light fixtures. D. Bonding Cements: May be achieved with solvents or adhesives, suitable for use with product and application. PART 3 - EXECUTION PLASTIC FABRICATIONS TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL 06 06 60 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of Plastic Fabrications will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements specified. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for the installation of Plastic Fabri- cations. B. Manufacturer's shop to fabricate items to the greatest degree possible. C. Utilize fasteners, adhesives and bonding agents recommended by manufacturer for type of in- stallation indicated. Material that is chipped, warped, hazed or discolored as a result of installa- tion or fabrication methods will be rejected. D. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with ap- proved shop drawings and product data E. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended procedures. Locate seams in panels so that they are not directly in line with seams in substrates. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces from damage until date of substantial completion. Repair work or replace damaged work, which cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction. End of Section 06 06 60 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL 06 06 60 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Solid Polymer Fabrication #1 (SPF -1) Product: [Replace with Collection and product name] Color: [Replace with color name] Gauge: [1/16"] [1/8"] [3/16"] [114"] [3/8"] [1/2"] [3/4"] [1 "] [As indicated on draw- ings] [As required to meet deflection requirements] Surface Finish: [Patent][Markerboard Plus] [Patina] [Pixel] [Sandstone] [Stucco] [Supermatte] [Other] UV Protection: Edge Sealing: [required] [not required] [required] [not required] Expansion/Contraction Allowance: Orientation: [Horizontal] [Vertical] END OF SECTION 083313 PLASTIC FABRICATIONS TRANSLUCENT RESIN PANEL 06 06 60 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 06 10 00 — ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and milers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 15 16 "Wood Roof Decking". 2. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing." 3. Section 06 17 60 "Metal Plate -Connected Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from dimension lumber. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC -ES: 1. Wood -preservative -treated wood. 2. Fire -retardant -treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Shear panels. 5. Power -driven fasteners. 6. Powder -actuated fasteners. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade. 1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing. 2. Species: a. Mixed southern pine. B. Load -Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions. 2. Species: a. Southern pine. C. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade. 1. Species: a. Southern pine. D. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand -selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot -holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 1. Application: Exposed exterior and interior framing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish. 2. Species and Grade: Southern pine; No. 2 grade. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 1. Mixed southern pine. 2. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4 -inch nominal thickness. 1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Depailuient of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A ; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Glass -fiber -resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1 -inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized -asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. D. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Water -Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3- EXECUTION. 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. E. Install sill sealer gasket to foam continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. H. Provide fire Mocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood -framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 -inch nominal- thickness. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS J. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. K. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two - Family Dwellings. L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. M. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Comply with indicated fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard. 2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure -preservative -treated, key -beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1 -by -3 -inch nominal- size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board Plaster Lath: Install 1 -by -2 -inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide double bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2 -inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non -load- bearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2 -by -6 -inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2 -by -6 -inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2 -inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non -load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non -load-bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers not less than 4 - inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6 -inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8 -inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10 -inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double -jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. D. Provide diagonal bracing in exterior walls, at both walls of each external corner at 45 -degree angle, full -story height unless otherwise indicated. Use 1 -by -6 -inch nominal- size boards, let -in flush with faces of studs. 3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. 1. At valleys, provide double -valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. 2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide 1 -by -6 -inch nominal- size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions if any. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 06 16 00 — SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof sheathing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant -treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SHEATHING 061600-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Depaitinent of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Certified Wood: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC -accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD -01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship". 1. Plywood. 2. Oriented strand board. C. Plywood: DOC PS 1 D. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. E. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. F. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.3 PRESERVATIVE -TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA Ul; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. SHEATHING 061600-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two - Family Dwellings." D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING 061600-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 06 26 14 - MINERAL PROFILE PANELING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Light weight composite mineral profile paneling and seam finishing materials to create a monolithic sculptured wall surface. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed/Used Under This Section: Installation kit. C. Related Requirements: 1. 09 29 00 -Gypsum Board: Substrate and seam finishing. 2. 09 91 23—Interior Painting: Sealing and painting of modular screen wall. 3. 26 51 00—Interior Lighting. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Altemates: 1. None accepted. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. 2. GA Gypsum Association. B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM D 256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. 2. ASTM D 696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. 3. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. GA -214 Recommended Levels of G .sum Board Finish. 5. LEEDGa •®Be`C § !' i 6 :n MINERAL PROFILE PANELING 062614-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -installation Meetings: 1. Convene meeting at project site within one week of scheduled start of installation with representatives of the following in attendance: Owner, Architect, General Contractor, Installer, Finisher, and Painter. 2. Review substrate conditions, requirements of related work, installation instructions, seam finishing, and painting instructions, storage and handling procedures, and protection measures. 3. Keep minutes of meeting including responsibilities of various parties and deviations from specifications and installation instructions. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Each product specified. B. Project List: Minimum 5 previous completed ModularArts, Inc. installations or 5 installations of similar materials and complexity. Include contact name and e-mail address or telephone number for each project. C. Shop Drawings: Show standard and project specific details including termination at adjacent surfaces. D. Samples: Minimum 15 by 15 inch panel of specified design(s). 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Qualification Statements: Proof of manufacturer, installer, and finisher qualifications. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer. Minimum five years experience in producing mineral profile paneling. 2. Installer: Minimum three years experience in finish carpentry/architectural woodwork installation. 3. Finisher: Minimum three years experience in executing Level 5 finish in accordance with GA - 214. B. Field Samples: 1. Provide in a location selected by Architect showing representative sample of installed product including finished seam. 2. Minimum Size: [8 by 8 feet] [ 8 by 8 feet]. 3. Approved field samples may remain as part of completed Work 4. Mock up to provide corner detail. MINERAL PROFILE PANELING 062614-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store panels in fully enclosed space, protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, and surface contamination. 2. Store panels vertically, in shipping crates, until ready to be installed. Loosen crate lids to allow for venting. Do not stack or lean against walls. 3. Store panels in area of installation minimum 24 hours prior to installation. B. Packaging Waste Management: 100 percent of materials used to package components of this section shall be recyclable. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Conditions: 1. HVAC: Operate HVAC system to maintain occupancy level temperature and relative humidity conditions (35 to 67 percent) in the area of installation from 24 hours prior to delivery of panels to the installation area through remainder of construction period. 2. Lighting: Permanent project lighting, including any special lighting used to highlight the profiled panels, must be operational prior to seam finishing. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Modular Arts, Inc. CORRESPONDENCE & BILLING ADDRESS: 944 NW Leary Way Seattle, WA 98107 SHIPPING & RECEIVING ADDRESS: 4215 - 23rd Avenue West Seattle, WA 98199 B. Substitution Limitations: None permitted. Tel: 206.788.4210 Fax: 206.788.4214 E-mail: info(cimodularArts.com Website: www.modularArts.com MINERAL PROFILE PANELING 062614-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Profile Panel: Smooth surface mineral composite panel with light weight plant -based foam back. 1. Size: 32 by 32 by 1.5 inch maximum profile relief. 2. Physical Properties: a. Izod Impact Strength: ASTM D 256 16 in*lbs b. Thermal Expansion: ASTM D 696 3.8x10-7in/in °F. c. Compressive Strength: ASTM D 696 2.3 ksi. d. Flame Spread Index: ASTM E 84 0 e. Smoke Development Index: ASTM E 84 50 f. Weight (for all designs excluding YUMA) 1.3 psf g. Weight (for YUMA design only) 3 psf 3. Design: Wade©; vertical orientation. Note: Modular Arts designs are protected by registered copyrights and may not be duplicated. Attempts to copy or closely mimic Modular Arts original designs will be considered a violation of intellectual property rights and will be duly pursued. B. Installation Kit: Item quantities in parenthesis denote quantities for (Small Kit—up to 50 panels/Large Kit—up to 100 panels). 1. Dry Mix Joint Compound: One 18 lb bag SHEETROCK® brand EASY SANDTM 45, or BEADEX® brand SILVER SETTM 40. 2. Acrylic Fortifier: (One/Two) quart THORO® ACRYL 60®. 3. Construction Adhesive: (12/24) 10.2 oz tubes PL® Polyurethane Premium Construction Adhesive. 4. Primer Sealer: (3/6) gal VALSPAR® LATEX MULTI-PURPOSE PRIMER. 5. Countersink Drill Bit with Depth Stop -Collar: (One/Two) No. 7. 6. Flexible Spreader: (One/Two) MUDTOOLS SMT -Y2 7. Sandpaper: (15/30) sheets No -Load 220G, (10/20) sheets No -Load 150G. 8. Plastic Container: One 100 oz. 9. Measuring Cup: One 8 oz. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: 30 lb self -drilling, drywall anchor. B. Screws: Coarse thread, drywall type, length as required by panel design and in accordance with Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Dimensions, length and width: ± 1/16 inch. MINERAL PROFILE PANELING 062614-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Thickness: 3. Weight: PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ± 1/16 inch. t 1/21b. A. Examine substrates upon which profile paneling will be installed. 1. Verify that substrate is a material listed as an acceptable substrate by the profile paneling manufacturer. B. Verify that permanent project lighting is in place and operational prior to start of seam finishing. C. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions. D. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install profile paneling in accordance with Manufacturer's Installation Instructions except that seam finishing shall be performed under Section 09 29 00 -Gypsum Board, and sealing and painting shall be performed under Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting. 3.3 CLEANING A. Waste Management: Refer to Section 01 74 00 ❑ Cleaning and Waste Management. 3.4 PROTECTION Protect finished work from damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 062614 MINERAL PROFILE PANELING 062614-5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 123623.13 "Plastic -Laminate -Clad Countertops." 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminatecabinet hardware and accessories. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outletsand other items installed in architectural plastic -laminate cabinets. 4. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Thermoset decorative panels. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, [8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm)], for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish 2. Wood -grain plastic laminates,1.2 by 24 inches (300 by 600 mm), for each type, pattern and surface finish. 3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installerand fabricator. B. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certifrcatesWl Certified Compliance Program certificates. C. Evaluation Reports: For fire -retardant -treated materials, from ICC -ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Shop is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification ProgramLicensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant -treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic -laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Grade: Premium. C. Regional Materials: Plastic -laminate cabinets shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. D. Certified Wood: Plastic -laminate cabinets shall be made from wood products certified as "FSC Pure"[ or "FSC Mixed Credit"] according to FSC STD -01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD -40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." E. Type of Construction: Frameless. F. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. G. Reveal Dimension: [1/2 inch (13 mm)]. H. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Fomica Corporation. c. Lamin -Art, Inc. d. Panolam Industries International, Inc. e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: [8 to 13] percent. 2. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 , made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 5. Veneer -Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP -1. 6. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire -test -response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. C. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. D. Fire -Retardant Fiberboard: Medium -density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Butt Hinges: 2 -3/4 -inch (70 -mm), five -knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095 -inch- (2.4 -mm-) thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. D. Back -Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071] [Ball friction catches, BHMA A156.9, B03013]. F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: [BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081] [BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112]. G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted[ and extending under bottom edge of drawer]; full-extensiontype; zinc -plated steelwith polymer rollers. I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous - metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate cabinets to d mens ons, profiles, and details indicated. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. E. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1./8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged fmish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch (3 min in 2400 -mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 064219 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling (decorative laminate surfacing). 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling unless concealed within other construction before paneling installation. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site . 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, includinghigh-pressure decorative laminate. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of paneling, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring and blocking, including concealed blocking specified in other Sections. 3. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to first page of Shop Drawings. C. Samples for initial selection for high-pressure decorative laminates. D. Samples for verification for plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mni, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core materialand specified edge material applied to one edge. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For InstallerFabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver paneling until painting and similar operations that could damage paneling have been completed in installation areas. If paneling must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support paneling by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that paneling can be installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELING, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling (decorative laminate surfacing) indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING A. Grade: Premium. B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and the following requirements: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc. c. Formica Corporation. d. Lamin -Art. Inc. e. Panolam Industries International Inca_rporated. f. Wilsonart International. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: D. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. 1. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, [Grade 130] <Insert grade>[, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde]. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, [Grade M-2] [Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde] [Grade M -2 -Exterior Glue]. 2.4 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of' significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire -test -response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discoloration from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. C. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. D. Fire -Retardant Fiberboard: Medium -density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous - metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls. C. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Use products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 4. Special -Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine - covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, rubber, or wood veneer 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.6 FABRICATION A. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times paneling fabrication will be complete. C. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition paneling to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing paneling, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install paneling to comply with same grade as paneling to be installed. B. Install paneling level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 min in 2400 tnm). Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96 -inch (1.6 nun in 2400 -mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96 -inch (3 mm in 2400 -min) horizontal variation from a true plane. 1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding [1/32 inch (0.8 min)] [1/16 inch (1.5 mm)]. C. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel -hanger clips. Do not use face fastening. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective paneling, where possible, to eliminate defects; where not possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust for uniform appearance. PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Clean paneling on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064219 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 064219 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 066510 - SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following horizontal and trim solid surface product types: 1. Countertops with sinks 2. Lavatory tops with undermount bowls 3. Vanity tops 4. Cold cafeteria surfaces 5. Hot cafeteria surfaces 6. Windowsills 7. Thermoforming 8. Cove backsplashes 9. Color inlays B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for Blocking. 3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 1.3 DEFINITION A. Solid surface is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings. 1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components. a. Show full-size details, edge details, thermoforming requirements, attachments, etc. b. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. c. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, waste receptacle and other items installed in solid surface. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Samples: 1. For each type of product indicated. a. Submit minimum 6 -inch by 6 -inch sample in specified gloss. b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. 2. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work. C. Product data: 1. Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements. D. LEED submittals: E. Fabricator/installer qualifications: 1. Provide copy of certification number. F. Maintenance data. 1. Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions. a. Maintenance kit for finishes shall be submitted. b. Include in project closeout documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Fabricator/installer qualifications: 1. Work of this section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, certified in writing by the manufacturer. C. Applicable standards - 1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) d. NSF International SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Fire test response characteristics: a. Provide with the following Class A (Class I) surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E84) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Job mock-up: 1. Prior to fabrication of architectural millwork, erect sample unit to further verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate the quality of materials and execution. 2. Mock-up shall be section of restroom countertop. 3. Build the mock-up to comply with the contract documents and install in a location as directed by the architect. 4. Notify the architect two weeks in advance of the date of when the mock-up will be delivered. 5. Should mock-up not be approved, re -fabricate and reinstall until approval is secured. a. Remove rejected units from project site. 6. After approval, the mock-up may become a part of the project. 7. This mock-up, once approved, shall serve as a standard for judging quality of all completed units of work. E. Pre -installation conference: 1. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. B. Store components indoors prior to installation. C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials. 1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. 2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be warranted. B. Optional Installed Warranty: 1. To qualify for the optional Installed Warranty, fabrication and installation must be performed by a DuPont Certified Fabrication/Installation source who will provide a brand plate for the application. 2. This warranty covers all fabrication and installation performed by the certified/approved source subject to the specific wording contained in the Installed Warranty Card. C. Manufacturer's warranty period: 1. Ten years from date of substantial completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance requirements as specified by the manufacturer. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Corian® surfaces from the DuPont company (basis of design). b. Gibralte c. Wilsonart solid surface 2.2 MATERIALS A. Solid polymer components 1. Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum physical and performance properties specified. 2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (.25 mm) shall be repairable by sanding and/or polishing. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Thickness: 1. 1/2 inch C. Edge treatment: 1. Eased edge E. Integral sink: 1. Model number: a. b. c. 2. Color: a. b. c. VERY FEW STYLES OF LAVATORIES ARE AVAILABLE IN COLORS. SELECT TYPE OF LAVATORY MOUNTING. SEAMED UNDERMOUNT IS STANDARD. 3. Mounting: a. Seamed undermount. F. Integral vanity: I. Model number: a. b. c. 2. Color: a. b. c. 3. Mounting: a. Seamed undermount. VERY FEW STYLES OF LAVATORIES ARE AVAILABLE IN COLORS. VERY FEW STYLES OF LAVATORIES ARE AVAILABLE IN COLORS. SELECT TYPE O1- LAVATORY MOUNTING. SEAMED UNDERMOUNT IS STANDARD. SELECT TYPE OE BACKSPLASH REQUIRED. IF MULTIPLE SELECTIONS ARE REQUIRED, ADD ADDITIONAL LANGUAGE. APPLIED IS STANDARD. DETAIL HEIGFIT ON DRAWINGS. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Backsplash 1. Coved. H. Sidesplash: 1. Coved. I. Performance characteristics: Property Tensile Strength D 638 Tensile Modulus D 638 Tensile Elongation D 638 Flexural Strength D 790 Flexural Modulus D 790 Hardness Rockwell "M" 56 Thermal Expansion D 696 (1.80 x 10-5 in./in./°F) Gloss (60° Gardner) Z124 Light Resistance LD 3-2000 Method 3.3 Wear and Cleanability ANSI Z124.3 & Stain Resistance: Sheets Z124.3 & Fungus and Bacteria Resistance G21 &G22 Boiling Water Resistance LD 3-2000 3.5 High Temperature Resistance LD 3-2000 Method 3.6 Izod Impact D 256 Typical Result 6,000 psi 1.5 x 10-6 psi 0.4% min 10,000 psi 1.2 x 10-6 psi >85 3.02 x 10-5 in./in./°C Test ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM Scale ASTM D 785 Barcol Impressor ASTM D 2583 ASTM 5-75 (matte highly polished) ANSI (Xenon Arc) No effect Passes NEMA Z124.6 Passes ANSI Z124.6 Does not support microbial growth ASTM No visible change NEMA Method No change NEMA 0.28 ft.-lbs./in. of notch ASTM SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS (Notched Specimen) (Method A) Ball Impact No fracture 12 Ib. ball: NEMA LD 3-2000 Resistance: Sheets 1/4" slab -36" drop Method 3.8 12" slab -144" drop Weatherability AE*94<5 in 1,000 hrs. ASTM G 155 Specific Gravity t 1.7 Water Absorption Long-term ASTM D 570 0.4% (3/4") 0.6% (12") 0.8% (1/4") Toxicity 99 (solid colors) Pittsburgh Protocol 66 (patterned colors) Test ("LC50"Test) Flammability All colors ASTM E 84, (Class I and Class A) NFPA 255 & UL 723 Flame Spread Index <25 Smoke Developed Index <25 t Approximate weight per square foot: 1/4" (6 mm) 2.2 lbs., U2" (12.3 mm) 4.4 lbs. Shapes meet or exceed the ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.6 standards for plastic sinks and lavatories. NEMA results based on the NEMA LD 3-2000 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint adhesive: 1. Manufacturer's standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, nonporous joints. B. Sealant: 1. Manufacturer's standard mildew -resistant, FDA -compliant, NSF 51 -compliant (food zone — any type), UL -listed silicone sealant in colors matching components. C. Sink/lavatory mounting hardware: 1. Manufacturer's standard bowl clips, panel inserts and fasteners for attachment of undermount sinks/lavatories. D. Conductive tape: SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturer's standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness, for use with cutouts near heat sources. E. Insulating felt tape: 1. Manufacturer's standard for use with conductive tape in insulating solid surface material from adjacent heat source. 2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION A. Shop assembly 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions and technical bulletins. 2. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints. a. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 2" wide. 3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings. 4. Rout and fmish component edges with clean, sharp returns. a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Smooth edges. c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. 2.5 FINISHES A. As specified on finish material list B. Finish: Matte PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data 1. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 2. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. a. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed. 3. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1 inch on either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top. 4. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 5. Rout radii and contours to template. 6. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports. 7. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. 8. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. 9. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 -inch (3 mm) sag, bow or other variation from a straight line. B. Coved backsplashes and applied sidesplashes: 1. Install applied sidesplashes using manufacturer's standard color -matched silicone sealant. 2. Adhere applied sidesplashes to countertops using manufacturer's standard color - matched silicone sealant. C. Coved backsplashes and sidesplashes: 1. Provide coved backsplashes and sidesplashes at all walls and adjacent millwork. 2. Fabricate radius cove at intersection of counters with backsplashes to dimensions shown on the drawings. 3. Adhere to countertops using manufacturer's standard color -matched Joint Adhesive. DELETE BELOW IF NOT ON PROJECT. D. Color inlays: 1. Comply with product data from manufacturer. 2. Rout groove for inlay to straight edge or pattern indicated on drawings. 3. Fill groove using material furnished by manufacturer. 4. Cure inlay, fmish and touch up to uniform appearance. DELETE BELOW IF NOT ON PROJECT. E. Integral sinks/vanities: 1. Provide solid surface materials bowls and/or lavatories sinks with overflows in locations shown on the drawings. 2. Secure sinks and lavatory bowls to tops using manufacturer's recommended sealant, adhesive and mounting hardware to maintain warranty. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.3 REPAIR A. Repair or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to architect's satisfaction. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep components clean during installation. B. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. DELETE SCHEDULE BELOW IF NOT REQUIRED FOR PROJECT OR IF SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS IS COMPLETE. COORDINATE WITH THE INFORMATION IN PART 2. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Reception areas: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash B. Nurses station: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color C. Seats: a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash h. Sink 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Laboratory tops: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash h. Sink E. Countertops: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash F. Bar tops: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash h. Sink THESE ARE SPECIFIC RECOMMENDATIONS REGARDING HOT APPLICATIONS MADE FROM COR'IAN© ACRYLIC MATERIAL. OTHER MATERIALS MAY HAVE DIFFERENT REQUIREMENTS. CONFIRM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS WITH MANUFACTURER. G. Cafeteria surfaces—hot: 1. Adhesively joined with no exposed open or silicone -filled seams. 2. Provide expansion joints in countertop as detailed on the drawings. 3. Make cutouts to templates furnished by the manufacturer. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Reinforce edges and cutouts as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Provide insulation between material and adjacent hot water pans and food warmers. 6. Thermally isolate hot applications from cold. 7. Provide venting of cabinets as required. a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish Color f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash h. Sink THESE ARE SPECIFIC RECOMMENDATIONS REGARDING COLD APPLICATIONS MADE FROM CORIAN® ACRYLIC MATERIAL. OTHER MATERIALS MAY HAVE DIFFERENT REQUIREMENTS. CONFIRM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS WITH MANUFACTURER. H. Cafeteria surfaces—cold: 1. Adhesively joined with no exposed open or silicone -filled seams. 2. Provide expansion joints in countertop as detailed on the drawings. 3. Make cutouts to templates furnished by the manufacturer. 4. Reinforce edges and cutouts as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Provide insulation between material and adjacent cold surfaces. 6. Thermally isolate hot applications from cold. a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash h. Sink Color I. Countertops with undermount stainless steel or porcelain sinks: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined using silicone sealant. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS h. Sink J. Countertops with seamed undermount solid surface sinks: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash h. Sink UNDERMOUNT LAVATORIES OF CHINA OR STAINLESS STEEL MAY BE USED. K. Countertops with traditional undermount lavatories: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with silicone sealant. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash h. Sink L. Integral vanity tops and lavatories: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish f. Backsplash g. Sidesplash h. Sink M. Windowsills: 1. Surfaces of material adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams. Color a. Vertical Thickness b. Horizontal Thickness SOLID SlURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-13 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. Inlay d. Edge Details e. Finish END OF SECTION 06651 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-14 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 07 11 13 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold -applied, emulsified -asphalt dampproofing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for mortar parge coat on masonry surfaces. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source from single manufacturer. Provide protection course, molded -sheet drainage panels and auxiliary materials recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials. B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction unless otherwise required. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 COLD -APPLIED, CUT -BACK -ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. APOC, Inc.; a division of Gardner -Gibson. 2. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 3. Brewer Company (The). 4. ChemMasters, Inc. 5. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. 6. Henry Company. 7. Karnak Corporation. 8. Koppers Inc. 9. Malarkey Roofing Products. 10. Meadows W. R., Inc. 11. Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn. B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I, Class 1, fibered. C. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered or nonfibered. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing. B. Cut -Back -Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. C. Emulsified -Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Asphalt -Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I. E. Patching Compound: Asbestos -free fibered mastic of type recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer. F. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm-) thick, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral -reinforced -asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt -saturated fibrous liners. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of bituminous dampproofing work. 1. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263. B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime material manufacturer. C. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; cover with asphalt -coated glass fabric or as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection. 2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage. B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished -grade line to top of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. 1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external comers, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8 -inch- (200 -mm-) wide strip of asphalt -coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that interrupt inner wythe. 2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto shelf angles supporting veneer. D. Where dampproofing interior face of above -grade, exterior concrete and masonry walls, continue dampproofing through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar joints at intersection temporarily open or by dampproofing wall before constructing intersecting walls. 3.4 COLD -APPLIED, EMULSIFIED -ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.2 L/sq. m) or as per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal /100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m). C. Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal /100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m). D. Exterior Face of Exterior CMU Walls: Where above grade and indicated to be furred and fmished, apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m). 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed -and -cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing-material and protection -course manufacturers' written instructions for attaching protection course. 1. Support protection course over cured coating with spot application of adhesive type recommended in writing by protection -board manufacturer. 2. Install protection within 24 hours of installation of dampproofing (while coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Place and secure molded -sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or other methods that do not penetrate dampproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded -sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. Install protection course before installing drainage panels. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 0711 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 071326 - SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. I. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. 2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside comers, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. 1. Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of pedestal -supported concrete pavers. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, including the following products: 1. 8 -by -8 -inch (200-b) -200-mm) square of waterproofing and flashing sheet. 2. 8 -by -8 -inch (200 -by -200 -inn)) square of insulation. 3. 4 -by -4 -inch (100 -)y -100 -min) square of drainage panel. SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Field quality -control reports. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofmg materials. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials -only warranty in which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofmg that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer's Special Warranty: on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of twoyears. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation, pedestals, and pavers on plaza decks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materialsfrom single source from single manufacturer. SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60 -mil (1.5 -mm) nominal thickness, self -adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4 -mil- (0.10- mm-) thick, polyethylene -film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Carlisle Coa.tines & Water Doli()* Inc; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. c. American fl ydrotech Inc; VM75. s Group, a srzbsidiarc_of AMCGL Internatio Envirosheet. d. GraceConstarction Products; W.R._Grace Temperature] [or] [Bituthene 4000]. e. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 100/200. f. Meadows, W.R.,tnc; SealTight Mel -Rol. g. Ncn'astral, Inc; BITU-MEM. h. Pollard Products, Inc; Polyguard 650. i. Protect() Wrap Cotnnany; PW 100/60. j. Tamko Building Products 'Inc; TW -60. k. York Manufacturing, Inc; HydroGard. 2. Physical Properties: in; [Bituthene 3000/Low a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi (1.7 M.Pa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Low -Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C); ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) movement; ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (1.80 N) minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight -gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F (21 deg C); ASTM D 570. g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. in) maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water Method. h. Hydrostatic -Head Resistance: [200 feet (60 m)] minimum; ASTM D 5385. 3. Sheet Strips: Self -adhering, rubberized -asphalt strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofmg. 1. Furnish liquid -type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by sheet -waterproofing material manufacturer. C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by sheet -waterproofing material manufacturer. D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two -component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or low viscosity. E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low -viscosity, two -component, modified asphalt coating. F. Metal Teunination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 m(n) thick, predrilled at 9 -inch (229 -mm) centers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the waterproofing. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, sound, and ready to receive waterproofing sheet. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrates for waterproofmg application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Install sheet strips of width according to manufacturer's written instructions and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [or] [1/8 inch (3 mm) F. Bridge and cover isolation joints,expansion jointsand discontinuous deck -to -wall and deck -to - deck joints with overlapping sheet strips of widths according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate. G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM 13 6135. 1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows: a. At footing -to -wall intersections, extend liquid membrane in each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner. b. At plaza -deck -to -wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet strips onto deck waterproofing and to finished height of sheet flashing. H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135. 3.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET -WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofmg in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2 -1/2 -inch- (64 -mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and plus 5 deg C), install self -adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low- temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F (16 deg C). D. Two -Ply Application: Install sheets to form a membrane with lap widths not less than 50 percent of sheet widths, to provide a minimum of two thicknesses of sheet membrane over areas to receive waterproofing. E. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps shed water. F. Apply continuous sheets over already -installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Seal edges of sheet -waterproofing terminations with mastic. H. Install sheet -waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing. I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches {150 mm} beyond repaired areas in all directions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish daily reports to Architect. 3.5 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 071326 SELF -ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass -fiber blanket insulation. 2. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry cells. 2. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for foam -plastic board sheathing over wood or steel framing. 3. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board " for installation in wood- and metal -framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning. A. Reinforced -Foil -Faced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame -spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil -scrim kraft, or foil -scrim polyethylene. Foil -Faced, 2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, [Class 1] [or] [Class 2], with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Rmax, Inc. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW -GRADE INSULATION On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) in from exterior walls. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Glass -Fiber Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3 -inch (76 -mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 6. For wood -framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. 7. Vapor -Retarder -Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor -retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction or as indicated on Drawings. b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity or as indicated on Drawings. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Where glass -fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches (1219 mm) up either side of partitions. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle -type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation -retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles. B. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose -fiber insulation. C. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 nim) o.c. 2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape according to vapor - retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor -retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor -retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor -retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 07 41 13 - STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work described in this section includes pre -formed metal roofmg system complete with clips, perimeter and penetration flashing, closures, gutters, and downspouts. B. Section also includes: 1. Underlayment Materials 1.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Thermal Expansion and Contraction. 1. Completed metal roofing and flashing system shall be capable of withstanding expansion and contraction of components caused by changes in temperature without buckling, or reducing performance ability. 2. The design temperature differential shall be not less than 220 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Interface between panel and clip shall provide for unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal direction. 4. Resistance to Wear Through, Replication of Thermal Movement: An assembled test specimen at least three panels wide spanning three or more supports shall be subjected to 100,000 cycles of movement, %" in each direction for a total of 1" of movement. Upon completion, the panel shall show no signs of wear through the panel nor shall the contact surfaces between the clip and the panel show more than 25% loss in metal thickness. B. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity. 1. Installed roof system shall withstand negative wind uplift pressures complying with the following criteria. a. Design Code: ASCE 7-10, Method 2 for Components and Cladding. b. Safety Factor: 1. In no instance shall the safety factor be less than 1.67 for any roof or wall zone. The provisions of Section D6.2.1a of Appendix A shall NOT be applicable for this project. c. Refer to Structural drawings for Risk and Exposure Category, wind speeds and design pressures. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. The ultimate capacity of the panel system shall be determined by performance testing in accordance with ASTM E1592. The allowable load carrying capacity shall be calculated in accordance with AISI S100 section D6.2.1, except the provisions of Section D6.2.la of Appendix A shall NOT be applicable for this project. C. Uniform Positive Load Capacity. 1. Uniform positive load capacity shall be determined in accordance with AISI S100. 2. The installed roof system shall be capable of resisting the following positive uniform roof loads: Roof Live Load of 20 psf. 3. Installed roof system shall carry positive uniform design loads with a maximum system deflection of L/180 as measured at the rib (web) of the panel. D. Wind Uplift Classification: The panel system shall be listed as a Class 90 windstorm rated system, as determined by UL 580. E. Fire Resistance Classification: The panel system shall be listed as a Class A Roof Covering, as determined by UL 790. F. Air infiltration: The panel system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E1680 and not exceed an air leakage rate of 0.0060 cfm/sq ft at a minimum test static air pressure difference of 20.0 psf. G. Water Infiltration: The panel system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E1646 and exhibit No Leakage at a static water exposure of 6.2 Gal/Hr and a test static air pressure difference of 20.0 psf for 15 minutes. H. Static water pressure head water infiltration. 1. The panel system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E2140, and pass with no leakage. The test specimen must include a panel end lap condition and successfully withstand being submerged under 6" of water for 6 hours. 2. The panel system shall be tested in accordance with the FBC TAS 114 Appendix G, and pass with no leakage. The test specimen must successfully withstand being submerged under 6" of water for 168 hours. I. Dynamic pressure water penetration. 1. The panel system shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1, and pass with no water penetration, other than condensation, when exposed to 8" per hour of dynamic rain and 70 mph wind velocities for not less than five (5) minutes duration. No water penetration, other than condensation, when exposed to 8" per hour of dynamic rain and 100 mph wind velocities for not less than five (1) minutes duration 2. The panel system shall be tested in accordance with FBC TAS 100, and pass with no water penetration, other than condensation, when exposed to 8.8" per hour of dynamic rain and 110 mph wind velocities for not less than five (5) minutes duration. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS J. Missile Impact Test and Cyclic Wind Pressure Test. 1. The panel system shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E1886. The tested system shall be of identical profile and material type as the specified panel for this project; thicker gauge and/or narrow width panels than those tested will be acceptable. The anchor clip spacing for this project shall be based on E1592 requirements, but shall not exceed that of the E1886 test report. 2. The panel system shall be tested in accordance with FBC Test Protocols TAS 201 and TAS 203. The tested system shall be of identical profile and material type as the specified panel for this project; thicker gauge and/or narrow width panels than those tested will be acceptable. The anchor clip spacing for this project shall be based on E1592 requirements, but shall not exceed that of the TAS 201 test reports. 1.4 QUALITY CRITERIA/INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Engage an experienced metal roof panel contractor (erector) to install wall panel system who has a minimum of three (10) years of experience specializing in the installation of metal wall systems. B. Fabricator/Installer shall submit work experience and evidence of adequate financial responsibility. Principal owners/officers of contracted installers shall have no history of bankruptcy within the last 15 years. Architect reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in determining qualifications. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer must specialize in the manufacturing of metal roof systems, and shall have successfully manufactured the specified wall system for minimum of (10) years. D. Financial Certification: Provide the architect with a signed and notarized (sealed) affidavit by an officer of the panel system manufacturer which confirms a current minimum corporate asset -to -liability ratio of not less than 3:1 for the panel manufacturer, or its parent corporation. Financial support information and affidavit must be dated within 30 days prior to the product submittal. E. Installing contractor must be trained, certified and in good standing with the manufacturer of standing seam system that is installed. Installing contractor must obtain written certification from the manufacturer that they are approved for installation of the specified system. F. Successful contractor must obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer. Any secondary products that are required which cannot be supplied by the specified manufacturer must be recommended and approved in writing by primary manufacturer prior to bidding. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Sole Source Requirements: All material and accessories for the system specified here within and all systems specified elsewhere listed in Section 1.2C. shall be fabricated and supplied by a single manufacturer. All specified warranties within these related specifications must be provided and endorsed by the single manufacturer. A manufacturer who cannot fabricate and supply all systems will not be accepted. Please refer to Section 1.5 for additional manufacturer requirements and PART 2: Products for product/manufacturer substitution requirements. H. Quality Assurance Inspections: Roof panel manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost to the owner, a minimum of five scheduled field inspections. A written report with corresponding photos shall be kept and made available immediately upon request. Inspections shall be conducted by a salaried employee of the roof panel manufacturer. Inspector shall be registered with the project architect prior to project commencement. Inspections conducted by roofing material distributors / dealers, or other third parties, will not be acceptable. The field inspector reserves the right to report to the project architect the level of quality and acceptability of work completed and to subsequently issue a report of items not acceptable --if required. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Show roof panel system with flashings and accessories in plan view; sections and details. Include metal thicknesses and finishes, panel lengths, joining details, anchorage details, flashings and special fabrication provisions for termination and penetrations. Indicate relationships with adjacent and interfacing work. Shop drawings to be prepared by metal roof panel manufacturer. B. Engineering Calculations: Submit negative wind uplift pressure calculations using the project and building code data listed in 1.3. Calculations shall be sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice structural engineering in the jurisdiction in which the project is located. C. Design Test Reports. 1. Submit copies of design test reports for each of the performance testing standards listed in specification article 1.3. 2. Test reports shall be performed by independent, accredited testing laboratories, and shall bear the seal of a registered professional engineer. 3. All required test reports must be completed and dated prior to the bid date of the project. Tests performed after the bid date will not be accepted. D. Written Certifications of Installing Contractor and Manufacturer. 1. Provide written certification from the metal roof manufacturer that the installing contractor is trained, certified and in good standing. 2. Upon request, the installer must submit written evidence they have installed a minimum of (5) projects of similar size and scope. The list must include the project name, project location, owner contact information, metal roof area size and metal roofing manufacturer used. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Provide a signed and notarized affidavit by an owner/officer of the contracted installer which confirms they and the installer have no history of bankruptcy. 4. Provide the building owner with a signed and notarized (sealed) affidavit by an officer of the panel system manufacturer which confirms a current minimum corporate asset -to -liability ratio of not less than 3:1 for the panel manufacturer, or its parent corporation. Financial support information and affidavit must be dated within 30 days prior to the product submittal. E. Warranty: Provide unexecuted specimen warranty documents for each warranty as required in specification article 1.9. F. Samples. 1. Submit sample of panel section, at least 6" x 6" showing seam profile and also a sample of color selected. 2. Submit sample of panel clip, gable clip, batten seam cap with sealant, and preformed metal and foam closures. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect materials upon delivery. B. Handle materials to prevent damage. C. Store materials off ground providing for drainage; under cover providing for air circulation; and protected from any debris. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks, purlins, rafters, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leak proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Endorse and forward to owner the following warranties: 1. Manufacturer's standard 20 Year No Dollar Limit year roof system weather tightness warranty. 2. The warranty shall cover all responsibility and liability for any damage or failures caused by wind gusts up to the design wind speed of 135 mph. 3. Manufacturer's standard 20 year finish warranty covering checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, fading, and adhesion of the pre -painted sheet metal materials. 4. Installer's 3 year warranty covering roof panel system installation and water tightness. B. Warranties shall commence on date of substantial completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Painted, metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. 1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is at least 70 percent. 2. 22 gauge, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet, as per ASTM A653: G90 coating designation; structural quality, grade 40 ksi. 3. Texture: Smooth surface. 4. Exposed Coil -Coated Finish: a. 2 -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Manufacturers' approved applicator to prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer and color coat. b. Color: As selected by architect from IMETCO standard colors. 5. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Seam Cap Sealant: Factory applied hot melt, high viscosity, pressure sensitive adhesive with high heat resistance. 2. Sealant Tape: Non -curing, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, no sag, nontoxic, non -staining tape 1 -inch wide and 1/16 -inch thick. 3. Exposed Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric tripolymer, polyurethane, or other advanced polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weather tight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Concealed Sealant: ASTM C 1311: Butyl -Based, Solvent -Release, One -Part Sealant. 5. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self -Adhering with reinforcing scrim, High -Temperature Sheet: 40 mil thick minimum, consisting of slip -resisting top surface laminated to SBS -modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing; cold applied. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 250 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low -Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 3. Seams shall be lapped in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Underlayment shall be approved for 90 days (minimum) of exposure to UV and weather penetrations. 5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Aqua Block 60 by IMETCO of Norcross, GA. b. Grace Construction Products- 40 mil Ice and Watershield c. Alternates must meet all performance criteria set forth herein. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Concealed fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel screws, #10 minimum diameter x length appropriate for substrate, hex washer head or pancake head. Use self -drilling, self -tapping for metal substrate or A -point for plywood substrate. B. Exposed fasteners: No Exposed fasteners are permitted anywhere on the roof system, including all perimeter and trim assemblies. 2.4 STANDING -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory -formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats and accessories required for weather tight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514. 2. Aluminum Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1637. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Vertical -Rib, Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panels with separate mechanically field crimped batten seam cap: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges, pencil beads and an intermediate stiffening rib symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for 2 - direction installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, attaching a separate batten seam cap and mechanically seaming panels together. 1. Basis -of -Design System: Panel shall be IMETCO Series 300 (S300) roof panel system as manufactured by Innovative Metals Company, Inc. (IMETCO), Norcross, Georgia, telephone (407) 375-0600: 2. Alternate manufacturers are subject to full compliance with specification requirements, and shall be submitted for approval as follows: a. Manufacturers not listed above must submit for approval, ten (10) days prior to bid date, and provide the following: Manufacturer's literature; all test reports to certify compliance with the design and performance requirements in article 1.4 of this specification; all test reports must be provided in accordance with article 1.5, D. of this specification; sample warranties in accordance with article 1.10 of this specification; certification of quality criteria and installer qualifications in accordance article 1.6 of this specification; and a list of five (5) similar projects in size and scope of work. b. No substitutions will be permitted after the bid date of this project. 3. Material and Thickness: Minimum 22 Guage. 4. Standing Seam Panel Width: Maximum 16". 5. Characteristics a. The same panel profile from a single manufacturer shall be used for ALL standing seam roof areas. b. Configuration: Standing seams incorporating mechanically interlocked, concealed anchor clips which allow unlimited thermal movement. 1) Profile of panel shall have two stiffening beads positioned 1-'/2" from the vertical seam and one raised stiffening rib centered in the panel. 2) Exposed fasteners, screws and/or roof mastic are unacceptable and will be rejected. c. Seam must be 2-3/8" minimum height for added strength for negative pressures and must have symmetrical design. Integral, asymmetrical seams are not acceptable. d. Panel Lengths: Panels must be furnished in continuous lengths from ridges to eaves. Panel end laps of any kind are not acceptable. e. Factory Formed Panels: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory. No site roll forming is permitted. Contractor owned and operated roll forming equipment is not permitted. f. Concealed Standard Anchor Clips: Clips must be 16 gauge galvanized steel ONE (1) piece clip with projecting legs for additional panel alignment and provision for unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal dimension. 1) Two-piece clips are NOT acceptable. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS g. 2) Clip design must isolate sealant in panel cap from clip to insure that no sealant damage occurs from the clip during expansion and contraction. 3) Clip must maintain a clearance of a minimum of 3/8" between panel and substrate for proper ventilation to help prevent condensation on underside of panel and eliminate the contact of panel fastener head to panel. Seam cap: Snap -on cap shall be a minimum of 1 -inch wide "T" shaped of continuous length up to 45 feet according to job conditions and field seamed by means of manufacturer's standard seaming machine. 1) Cap shall be designed to receive two (2) beads of hot applied, high viscosity, pressure sensitive adhesive with high heat resistance during manufacturing which will not come in contact with the anchor clip. 2) In all cases, seam caps shall be factory formed to insure quality and precision in the process of sealant application. h. Stiffening ribs: Located in flat of panel to minimize oil canning and telegraphing of structural members. i. Replaceability: Panels shall be of a symmetrical design with mechanically seamed cap configuration such that individual panels may be removable for replacement without removing adjacent panels and installation may proceed in both directions simultaneously. j. Panel ends shall be folded up 90 degrees at ridge, headwall, and hip conditions, where applicable. No metal shall be cut or otherwise perforated at the folded end. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, comer units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin -foam or closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1 -inch thick, flexible closure strips meeting ASTM D1056 and/or D3575; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and gauge as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 10'-0" long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced per SMACNA's recommendation based on gauge and stretch -out, fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels. D. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10'-0" long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Finish downspouts to match gutters. E. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, minimum and welded top box and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb sub framing of minimum 0.0598 - inch thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and sub framing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Refer to section 2.8, Item e. for field roll forming allowances and requirements. 2. Field roll forming is only permitted if panels are longer than 50' in length and it is more cost effective to field roll form than factory fabricate. 3. No contractor owned roll for niers are permitted. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Fabricate metal roof batten seam cap with factory -installed hot melt, high viscosity, pressure sensitive adhesive with high heat resistance, in a manner that will seal weathertight. D. Form flashing components from full single width sheet in minimum 10'-0" sections. Provide mitered corners, joined using closed end pop rivets and butyl -based, solvent released one -part sealant. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Sealed Joints: Foran nonexpanding but movable joints in metal to accommodate butyl -based sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 4. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.7 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted fmishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. C. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. D. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation. E. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Substrate Board: Install substrate boards over roof deck on entire roof surface. Attach with substrate -board fasteners. 1. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. C. Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub -purlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. D. Establish straight, side and crosswise benchmarks E. Use proper size and length fastener for strength requirements. Approximately 5/16 inch is allowable for maximum fastener head size beneath the panel. F. Rectangular roofs shall be checked for square and straightness. Gable ends may not be straight; set a true line for the gable clips and flashing with string line. G. Measure the roof lengthwise to confirm panel lengths, overhangs, coverage of flashings at eaves and ridges and verify clearances for thermal movement. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 90 days. B. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. C. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. D. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. AH details will be shown on in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data, within specified erection tolerances. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Directly over the completed roof substrate, install one piece clips. For insulated roof systems with no cover boards (plywood, dens dek, etc.) all anchor clips will be set on 16 gauge galvanized pre -punched bearing plates to distribute the loads on the board insulation. C. Installation of Roof Panels: Roof panels can be installed by starting from one end and working towards the opposite end. Due to the symmetrical design of the specified panel system, it is also acceptable to start from the middle of the roof and work toward each end. 1. A stainless steel rivet shall be secured through the anchor reveal of the panel leg and extend into the arms of the panel clip located at the ridge of the system. This is done at each arm of the clip along the ridge. The panel is then anchored at both sides of the clip. a. Be sure to capture all drilling debris during this operation with a rag or cloth placed on the panels at the drilling operation. b. Panels are not securely attached to the roof until fixed to the anchor clip. To avoid damage and injury, all panels shall be fixed to the anchor clip immediately as they are installed. c. The seam caps shall be shipped with two (2) beads of factory applied hot melt sealant located inside the caps. To install the caps, hook one side of the cap over the panel edge and rotate over the opposite panel leg. For ease of installation, start at one end of the panel and work toward the opposite end. d. A hand crimping tool is used to crimp the cap around the top of two adjacent panels. e. Caps shall then be permanently seamed with manufacturer's mechanical seamer. D. Isolate dissimilar metals and masonry or concrete from metals with bituminous coating. Use gasketed fasteners where required to prevent corrosive action between fastener, substrate, and panels. E. Limit exposed fasteners to extent indicated on contract drawings. F. Seal laps and joints in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's product data. G. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal work to provide weathertight conditions at roof terminations. Fabricate and install in accordance with standards of SMACNA Manual. H. Provide for temperature expansion/contraction movement of panels at roof penetrations and roof mounted equipment in accordance with system manufacturer's product data and design calculations. I. Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects. In light gauge panels with wide flat surfaces, some oil canning may be present. Oil canning does not affect the finish or structural integrity of the panel and is therefore not cause for rejection. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 13 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS J. At joints in linear sheet metal items, set sheet metal items in two /-inch beads of butyl sealant. Extend sealant over all metal surfaces. Mate components for positive seal. Allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces. K. Remove damaged work and replace with new, undamaged components. L. Touch up exposed fasteners using paint furnished by roofing panel manufacturer and matching exposed panel surface finish. M. Clean exposed surfaces of roofing and accessories after completion of installation. Leave in clean condition at date of substantial completion. Touch up minor abrasions and scratches in fmish. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 14 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS END OF SECTION 07 41 13 STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07 41 13 - 15 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 07 46 45 FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID RAINSCREEN SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board and Panel Rainscreen Siding for walls and soffits with batten strips. B. Trim, flashings, accessories, and fastenings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold -Formed Metal Framing: Siding substrate. E. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding. F. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Product requirements for metal flashings and trim associated with wood siding for placement by this section. G. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at perimeter. H. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Siding substrate of gypsum sheathing. I. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Prime and fmish painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process ; 2010. B. ASTM D696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 Degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer ; 2008. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ; 2010b. D. DIN EN 320 - Particleboards and fibreboards - Determination of resistance to axial withdrawal of screws ; 2011. E. DIN EN ISO 4892 - Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources ; 2009. F. DIN V ENV 12038 - Durability of wood and wood -based products - Wood -based panels - Method of test for determining the resistance against wood -destroying basidiomycetes ; 2002 G. DIN EN 12664 - Laboratory glassware; one -mark volumetric flasks, flasks with glass round thread ; 1981. H. DIN EN ISO 178 - Plastics - Determination of Flexural Properties ; 2010. I. DIN EN ISO 527 - Plastics - Determination of Tensile Properties ; 2012. J. DIN EN ISO 11925 Reaction to Fire Tests - Ignitability of products subjected to direct impingement of flame ; 2010 (Cor 1:2011). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, fmishes, and accessories. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size illustrating surface texture. FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID RAINSCREEN SIDING 07 46 45 - 1 D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size to applicator of finish paint for use in preparation of finish samples. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than threeyearsof documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store in ventilated areas with constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. C. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within one year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide fifteen (15) year manufacturer warranty for materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Fiber Reinforced Siding: Basis -of -Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Resysta North America, Inc.: Product, Resysta Decking; www.resysta.us. (909) 465-1000 13771 Roswell Avenue, Suite H, Chino, California 91710, Florida contact: Birgit Auge, XO Living 1800 Sunset Harbour Drive suite 2112, Miami Beach, FL 33139 or comparable product by one of the following: Geolam Architectural Eco -Technology Innowood Sustainable Timber Aternative 2.03 MATERIAL A. Fiber reinforced hybrid siding shall be an extruded composite consisting of a proprietary blend of approximately 60% rice husks, 22% common salt and 18% mineral oil. B. Properties: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: a. Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. Fire Rating (per EN ISO 11925-2): E (B2) 2. Bending Strength: 6,671 psi (46 N/sq.mm) per ISO 178. 3. Bending E -Modulus: 558,420 psi (3850 N/sq.mm per ISO 178). 4. Tensile Strength: 3,162 psi (21,8 N/sq mm) per ISO 527. 5. Tensile E -Modulus: 339,440 psi (2340 N/sq.mm). FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID RAINSCREEN SIDING 07 46 45 - 2 6. Screw Withdrawal: 1,299 lbf (5777 N). a. Screw extension stability according to EN 320. 1) Axial extraction force: 609,456 psi (4202 N/sq mm) 2) Axial extraction resistance: 40,615 psi (280 N/sq.mm). 7. Thermal Conductivity (DIN EN 12664): 1.38 BTU-in/hr-sq.ft. (ca. 0.199 W/(mK)). 8. Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (ASM 696): 0.0000656 ft./ft.F (3.6x10(-5) m/mC). 9. Density (Approximate): 75 lb./cu.ft. (1201 kg/cu.m). 10. Humidity - Water Absorption Behavior: Low to no absorption of water or dimensional change. 11. Fungal Resistance (DINV ENV 12038:2002): No attack by test fungi, highest durability class 1. 12. Weathering (DIN EN ISO 4892-3: No cracks, blisters or other visible changes after 1500 hours. 13. Emissions: a. LGA Tested (Passed) b. Formaldehyde emission: <0.01 ppm c. PCP (pentachlorophenol): <8 x 10-6 oz. Ib. d. TeCP (tetrachlorophenol): <8 x 10-6 oz. lb. e. DEEP (Diethylhexylphtalate): <0.05 % f. BBP (Benzylbutylphtalate): <0.05 % g. DBP (Di-n-butylphtalate): <0.05% h. PAH (Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons) skin contact under 30 sec. total: 10 mg/kg i. benzo(a)pyrene: 10 mg/kg j. Cadmium: 0.005% C. Recycled content: 60 percent. D. Fiber reinforced hybrid siding shall be workable, sandable and stainable similar to normal wood products. 2.04 SIDING A. Board Siding: RESCP120612. 1. Size: 0.51 inches (13 mm) thick, 6.8 inches (173 mm) high nominal board with 1/4 inch (6 mm) interlocking shiplap. 2. Maximum Span: 24 inches. 3. Profile: Flat face with ribbed back and grooved shiplap edge. 4. Surface Texture: Sanded. B. Board Siding: RESCP120412. 1. Size: 0.51 inches (13 mm) thick, 5.04 inches (128 mm) high nominal board with 1/4 inch (6 mm) interlocking shiplap. 2. Maximum Span: 24 inches. 3. Profile: Flat face with ribbed back and grooved shiplap edge. 4. Surface Texture: Sanded: C. Batten (Furring) Strips: Same as siding; x inch (_x_ mm). D. Batten (Furring) Spacers: 1. Model RUS 3825; Size: 1 inch (25 mm) thick, 1-1/2 inches (38 min) wide solid core board with intemal ribs. 2. Model RUH 3825; Size: 1 inch (25 mm) thick, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide hollow core board with internal ribs. FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID RAINSCREEN SIDING 07 46 45 - 3 3. Texture: Smooth Matte. 4. Color: Black. E. Corner Strip Closure (End Caps): 1. ANP 5050; L -Angle shaped; Size: 2 inches (50 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) wide by length. 2. ANP 6060; L -Angle shaped; Size: 2-23/64 inches (60 mm) thick by 2-23/64 inches (60 mm) wide by length. 3. Install miscellaneous trims as shapes as required to provide a complete assembly 2.05 FINISH A. Stains and Sealer: Select from manufacturer's standard glaze colors. 1. Manufacturer Provided Standard Stain Color: a. Transparent - FVG C 00. b. Burma - FVG C 08. c. Siam - FVG C 14. d. Aged - FVG C 23. e. Java - FVG C 24. f. Walnut-FVGC51. 2. Manufacturer Provided Premium Stain Color: a. Dark Beige - FVG C 02. b. Dark Siam - FVG C 15. c. Hazelnut - FVG C 26. d. Taupe - FVG C 28. e. Dark Taupe - FVG C 29. f. Light Grey - FVG C 42. g. Yellow - FVG C 45. h. Mud - FVG C 46. i. Transparent Green - FVG C 47. j. Transparent Pink - FVG C 49. k. Transparent Orange - FVG C 52. 1. DarkGrey-FVGC53. m. Red - FVG C 3001. n. Dark Red FVG C3011. o. Blue - FVG C 5010. P. Green - FVG C 6002. q. Black - FVG C 9005. r. White - FVG C 9010. 3. Sealer: 2K Protection Varnish. (Note: This sealer product is recommended to protect the stain.) B. Use of non -manufacturer water borne or oil-based stain is not recommended and may violate the product warranty. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Nails and Screws: Corrosion resistant type; non -staining, of size and strength to securely and rigidly retain the work ; prefinished to match siding fmish. B. Flashing: Galvanized steel as specified in Section 07 62 00. C. Accessory Components: Fascias, Starter strips, and Trim of same material and finish as siding. FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID RAINSCREEN SIDING 07 46 45 - 4 D. Prime Paint: Latex base primer enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate conditions before beginning installation; verify dimensions and acceptability of substrate. B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. C. Confirm metal flashings are installed at sills, heads of wall openings, and horizontal joints of sheet materials. D. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install siding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Preplan cuts to allow for expansion gaps at inside and outside corners. 2. Provide joint gaps as indicated on Drawings. Typical joint width is approximately 3/8 inch. B. Attach vertical support battens (furring) securely to framing, not sheathing, with horizontal components true to level and vertical components true to plumb, providing a weather resistant installation. 1. Place vertical support battens (furring) to allow screw attachment within two inches of the end of the horizontally placed siding panels. 2. Confirm battens provide minimum 3/4 inch airspace between siding and weather barrier. C. Apply finish stain to individual planks, panels and trim prior to installation. D. Fasten siding in place, level and plumb. 1. Arrange for orderly nailing pattern. Blind nail except on overlapping trim. 2. Install siding for natural shed of water. 3. Position cut ends over bearing surfaces. Sand cut edges smooth and clean. E. Install corner strips. F. Install joint sealers between siding/soffit/trim and adjacent construction, using procedures specified in Section 07 90 05. G. Touch-up prefinished paint surfaces that are disfigured. Unsightly touch-up will require removal and replacement of affected siding. H. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. Ease sharp edges with 80-100 grit sandpaper for color uniformity prior to staining. I. Prepare for site finishing specified in Section 09 90 00. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb and Level: 1/4 inch per 10 feet (6 mm/3 m). B. Maximum Offset From Joint Alignment: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID RAINSCREEN SIDING 07 46 45 - 5 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION FIBER REINFORCED HYBRID RAINSCREEN SIDING 07 46 45 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 075416 - ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanically fastened ethylene interpolyemer (KEE) roofmg system. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation. B. Section includes the installation of insulation strips in ribs of deck. Insulation strips are furnished under Section 053100 "Steel Decking." C. Related Requirements: 1. [Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"] [Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry"] for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and for wood -based, structural -use roof deck panels. 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wood -based, structural -use roof deck panels. 3. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation. 4. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and counterflashings. 5. Section 077129 "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for proprietary manufactured roof expansion joint assemblies. 6. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 7. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to roofmg installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness and fastening. 4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. B. Preinstallation Roofmg Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Review and fmalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings For roofmg system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including: 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing. 4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field -of -roof locations. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Sheet roofmg, of color required. 2. Aggregate surfacing material in gradation[ and color] required. 3. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofmg system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements. C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofmg system, from ICC -ES. E. Field quality -control reports. F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for roofing system identical to that used for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofmg system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofmg system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards,substrate board,roofing accessoriesand other components of roofing system. 2. Warranty Period[15 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Con. kiln Company Inc. 2. Custom Seal Roofing. 3. EcolInd Industrial Rooting Systems. 4. Flex 5. 6. ,orated. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofmg system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. 2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272. B. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. C. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.3 KEE ROOFING A. KEE Sheet: ASTM D 6754/D 6754M, fabric reinforced[ and fabric backed]. 1. Thickness: 50 mils 2. Exposed Face Color: [White] [Gray] <Insert color>. 2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofmg system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing. 1. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Single -Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. g. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L h. Single -Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 1. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as KEE sheet. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard[, . D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application. E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 min) thick; with anchors. F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum -zinc -alloy -coated or zinc -coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 min thick), prepunched. G. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion - resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T -joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories. 2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, Type X gypsum board, 5/8 inch (16 zmn) thick. B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1 177/C 1177M, glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum substrateType X, 5/8 inch (16 min)] thick. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirementsavailable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation;. b. Georgia.Pacific Corporation;. c. National Gypsum Cotn»an ; d. Temple-Inland, Inc; USG GoTeraiion;. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. C. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion - resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.6 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by KEE roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for applicationExtruded- Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 1.6-1b/cu. ft. (26-kg/en. m)] minimum density, square edged. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirementsavailable manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dive 11 Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Corporation. 2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion - resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer. C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows: 1. Modified asphaltic, asbestos -free, cold -applied adhesive. 2. Bead -applied, low-rise, one -component or multicomponent urethane adhesive. 3. Full -spread spray -applied, low-rise, two -component urethane adhesive. D. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application. 2.8 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip -resisting, surface -textured walkway padsor[rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof -drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking." 4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed. 5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 6. Verify that concrete -curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Install insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofmg system according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition[ and to not void warranty for existing roofing system]. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM Global's "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofmg system manufacturers' written instructions. 3.5 VAPOR -RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Self -Adhering -Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install self - adhering -sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 inches (90 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), respectively. Seal laps by rolling. B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofmg system. 3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (88 min) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. 1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of milers, projections, and penetrations. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. (03 L/sq. m), and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 3. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead -applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 4. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full -spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. I. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 4. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead -applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 5. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full -spread insulation adhesive, fimdy pressing and maintaining insulation in place. J. Loosely Laid Insulation: Loosely lay insulation units over substrate. K. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together[ and fasten to roof deck]. 1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. L. 3.7 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofmg and allow to relax before installing. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing. E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofmg. F. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements. H. Spread sealant bed over deck -drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring. 3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect. 1. Electric Field Vector Mapping (EFVM): Testing agency shall survey entire roof area for potential leaks using electric field vector mapping (EFVM). B. Flood Testing: Flood test each roofing area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing roofing and flashing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. 1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (65 min) with a minimum depth of 1 inch (25 mni) and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50 inm) of clearance from top of base flashing. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Flood each area for 48 hours. 3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until roofing and flashing installations are watertight. C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofmg system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements. 3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofmg system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofmg system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents 'and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS of , herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Acceptance Date: Date of Substantial Completion: 6. Warranty Period: 20 years. 7. Expiration Date: B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. lightning; b. fire; c. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; d. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; e. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and f. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from Leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofmg Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray -cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofmg Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of 1. Authorized Signature: 2. Name: ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 13 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Title: END OF SECTION 075416 ETHYLENE INTERPOLYMER (KEE) ROOFING 075416 - 14 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes sprayed fire -resistive materials (SFRM). 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following: 1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire -resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire -resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire -resistance rating of each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer andtesting agency. B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing. C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC -ES. D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For fireproofing. E. Field quality -control reports. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. I. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire -resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in referenced fire -resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied -fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or primers. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is [44 deg F (7 deg C}] or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced -air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire -resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofingfrom single source. C. Fire -Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to [ASTM E 119] [ASTM E 119 or UL 263] > by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 2.2 SPRAYED FIRE -RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. SFRM : Manufacturer's standard, factory -mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire -resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and applicationorconveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized water at place of application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carboline Company: RPM International; AD Southwest Fireproofing Type 7GPAD Southwest Fireproofing Type 7HDPyrolite 15. b. Grace Construction Products. W.R. Grace & Co. — Conn; Grace Construction Products; Monokote MK-6 Series. c. Isolatek International Inc.; Cafco 300Cafco Blaze -Shield HP. d. Pyrok, Inc; Pyrok-HD. e. Southwest Fireproofing Products Co; Type 7GP. 2. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bond Strength: Minimum [150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.18 -kPa)] cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736. 4. Density: Not less than [15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) as specified in the approved fire - resistance design, according to ASTM E 605. 5. Thickness: As required for fire -resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire -resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm). 6. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 7. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame -Spread Index:10 or less. b. Smoke -Developed Index: 10 or less. 8. Compressive Strength: Minimum [1.00 lbf/sq. in. (689 kPa)] according to ASTM E 761. 9. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 10. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 11. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 760. 12. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finishes 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire -resistance designs indicated. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the following requirements: I. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire -resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Primer's bond strength in required fire -resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736. C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofmg manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required, according to fire -resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, comer beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing. E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon -fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire -resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire -resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire -resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application. B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed before beginning fireproofmg work. C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof -top HVAC equipment, and other related work is complete before beginning fireproofmg work. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing. C. Prime substrates where included in fire -resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofmg. D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire - resistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire -resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire -resistance ratings indicated. C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. 1. Do not begin applying fireproofmg until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofmg are in place. 2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed. D. Metal Decks: 1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. 2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire -resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. H. Install body of fireproofmg in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. I. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants, apply fireproofing that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied. J. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofmg over which they are applied. K. Provide a uniform fmish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups. L. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. M. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. N. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected. 2. Spray -Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment. 3. Rolled, Spray -Textured Finish. Even finish produced by rolling spray -applied finish with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness. 4. Skip -Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray -applied finish to smooth out the texture and neaten edges. 5. Skip -Troweled Finish with Corner Beads: Even, leveled surface produced by troweling spray -applied finish to smooth out the texture, eliminate surface markings, and square off edges. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofmg for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire -resistance design. B. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning- Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect fireproofmg, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades. D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel -applied product. END OF SECTION 078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire -resistance -rated walls. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire -protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire - resistance -rated assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core -drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. AID Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Iiil(i Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NTICOInc. 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc. 10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco. lnc.: Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation. 13. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire - resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire -Resistance -Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01 -inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. Fire -resistance -rated walls include fire walls 2. F -Rating: Not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. W -Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. E. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. F. Low -Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Depaitment of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag -wool -fiber or rock -wool -fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire -rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast -in -Place Firestop Devices: Factory -assembled devices for use in cast -in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single -component latex formulations that do not re -emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory -assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum -foil -faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized -steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single -component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat -expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass -fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral -fiber, water -insoluble expansion agents, and fire -retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel -reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealants: Single -component, silicone -based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self -leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire -resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self -adhering -type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perfoun tests and inspections. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Acoustical joint sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Sections for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing. 2. Division 4 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry" and "reinforced Unit Masonry" for masonry control joint fillers and gaskets. 3. Division 7 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire -resistance - rated construction. 4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 5. Division 8 Section "Structural -Sealant -Glazed Curtain Walls" for structural and other glazing sealants. 6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 7. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints. 8. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealants. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint -sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C 1087 or manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint -sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5. Testing will not be required if joint -sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. B. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint -sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field -Adhesion -Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, with joint sealants in 1/2 -inch- wide joints formed between two 6 -inch- long matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint -sealant formulation. JOINT SEALANTS of cured sealants provide Samples strips of material 079200-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Joint -sealant color. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. F. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. G. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. I. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. J. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. K. Field -Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. L. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion -in -peel, and indentation hardness. D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint -sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Liquid -Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single -Component, Nonsag, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following. a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS, 311 NS, 890, or 890FTS. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1, Spectrem 800. B. Single -Component, Nonsag, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS, 791, 795, or 995. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II, SCS2800, SilPruf NB SCS9000, SilPruf SCS2000 or UltraPruf II SCS2900. c. Pecora Corporation; 864, 895 or 898. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 or Spectrem 3. C. Single -Component, Nonsag, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000 or UltraGlaze SSG4000AC. c. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG or Tremsil 600. D. Single -Component, Nonsag, Acid -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 999-A. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Contractors SCS1000 or Construction SCS 1200. c. Pecora Corporation; 860. d. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze, Tremsil 200. E. Single -Component, Nonsag, Traffic -Grade, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Coming Corporation; 790 or NS Parking Structure Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS, 311 NS. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800. F. Single -Component, Pourable, Traffic -Grade, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890 -SL, SL Parking Structure Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL, 310 SL. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900 SL. G. Mildew -Resistant, Single -Component, Acid -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Coming Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single -Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921, Dymonic FC. B. Single -Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1, or Sonolastic Ultra. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - la. c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116. C. Single -Component, Pourable, Traffic -Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1. b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR -201. c. Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex John Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC -20+. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 FTR or AIS -919. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin) or Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) as approved in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas ofjoint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound -rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field -Adhesion Testing: Field test joint -sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field -adhesion hand -pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field -adhesion -test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field -Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.7 JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Joints between different materials listed above. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade, neutral curing. 3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade, Single component, pourable, traffic grade. 4. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Construction joints in cast -in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant -precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints between metal panels. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS e. Joints between different materials listed above. f. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. g. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. h. Other joints as indicated. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral or acid curing as appropriate to substrate and movement range. 3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, Class 100/50 or 25 as appropriate to movement range. 4. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade, neutral curing. 3. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade or Single component, pourable, traffic grade. 4. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry, concrete, walls and partitions. e. Joints on underside of plant -precast structural concrete beams and planks. f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. g. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint -Sealant Application: Mildew -resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Location: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral or acid curing, Silicone. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Location: a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 13 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER10O% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior expansion control systems. 2. Exterior wall expansion control systems. B. Related Requirements: I. Section 077129 "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for factory -fabricated roof expansion control. 2. Section 078446 "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" for liquid -applied joint sealants in fire - resistive building joints. 3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for liquid -applied joint sealants and for elastomeric sealants without metal frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams showing entire route of each expansion control system. Where expansion control systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect. B. Samples: For each exposed expansion control system and for each color and texture specified, full width by 6 inches (150 mm) long in size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of expansion control system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of expansion control system indicated, full width by 6 inches (150 mm) long in size. E. Product Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following information in tabular form: EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturer and model number for each expansion control system. 2. Expansion control system location cross-referenced to Drawings. 3. Nominal joint width. 4. Movement capability. 5. Classification as thermal or seismic. 6. Materials, colors, and finishes. 7. Product options. 8. Fire -resistance ratings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each fire barrier provided as part of an expansion control system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design; basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces. 1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other materials. 2. Include factory -fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T joints, corners, curbs, cross -connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion control systems. B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall and soffit expansion control systems with roof expansion control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion joint assemblies are specified elsewhere. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide expansion control systems with fire barriers identical to those of systems tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall -to -ceiling systems shall be subjected to hose stream testing. 2.3 INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Architectural. Art Mfg.. Inc.: Division of Pittcon Indus 2. 13alco, Inc. 3. Construction$ecialties.l nc.. 4. 7ointMaster/luPro C 5. Michael Rizza Company, L 6. MM Systems Corporation. 7. Nvstrom, Inc. 8. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASE' Construction Chemicals business. 9. B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer. C. Floor -to -Floor: 1. Design Criteria: a. Nominal Joint Width: 1/2". b. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+75 percent . 2. Type: Cover plate. a. Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Floor -to -Wall: 1. Design Criteria: a. Nominal Joint Width: 1/2". b. -25 percent/+75 percent. 2. Type: Cover plate. a. Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard . 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range E. Wall -to -Wall: 1. Design Criteria: a. Nominal Joint Width: 1/2". b. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+75 percent . 2. Type: Cover plate. a. Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . F. Wall -to -Ceiling : 1. Design Criteria: EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Nominal Joint Width: 1/2". b. -25 percent/+75 percent. 2. Type: Cover plate a. Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . G. Ceiling -to -Ceiling : 1. Design Criteria: a. Nominal Joint Width: 1/2". b. -25 percent/+75 percent. 2. Type: Cover plate. a. Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . 2.4 EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Architectural Art Mfg.. Inc.: Di`visit 2. Balco,Inc. 3. Chase Construction Products: Divis 4. Construction. Specialtiestic. 5. D. S. Brown Cnmpany__1Chel. 6. EMSEAL Corporation. 7. Erie Haat Specialties, Inc. 8. IontMastertlnPro Corporation. Inc. 9. LyinTa 10. Michael RizzaCampany_-LLC. 11. MWI Systems Corporation. 12. Nystrom, lnc. 13. RJ Watson. Inc. 14. Schul International Conpany, Inc. 15. Tr -o Inctporated. an Indust Chase tCot ration. 16. Watson I3owman Acme Cor•, a F .ASP Construction Chemicals business 17. Williams Products, Inc B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer. C. Wall -to -Wall: 1. Design Criteria: EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Nominal Joint Width: 1/2". b. -25 percent/+75 percent . 2. Type: Cover plate. 3. Type: Preformed cellular foam. a. Foam Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . 2.5 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 for plates, sheet, and strips. 1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. B. Elastomeric Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in metal frames. C. Compression Seals: ASTM E 1612; preformed elastomeric extrusions having an internal baffle system and designed to function under compression. D. Cellular Foam Seals: Extruded, compressible foam designed to function under compression. E. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling, designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and to meet performance criteria for required fire -resistance rating. F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. C. Bright, Cold -Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces where expansion control systems will be installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion control systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion control systems. C. Cast -In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control systems. 1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. 2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper expansion control system installation and performance. 3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. 4. Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic, shrinkage -resistant grout. 5. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. a. Shimming is not permitted. EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) from each end and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints. 1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. 2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat -weld field -spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer. D. Compression Seals: Apply adhesive or lubricant adhesive as recommended by manufacturer to both [frame interfaces] [sides of slabs] before installing compression seals. E. Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer. F. Epoxy -Bonded Seals: Pressurize seal for time period and to pressure recommended by manufacturer. Do not overpressurize. G. Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory -fabricated termination devices. H. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion control system materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. 1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over expansion control systems. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. END OF SECTION 079500 EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames. 3. Louvers installed in hollow metal doors. 4. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. 2. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors. 3. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 4. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc - Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 12. ANSUNFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 13. ANSI/NEPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. 15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire -resistance rating, and finishes. B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. - 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not current members of the Steel Door Institute. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL 10C. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Oversize Fire -Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature -Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire -test exposure. 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear "S" label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. D. Fire -Rated, Borrowed -Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material. E. Pre -Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non -vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 -inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard foam in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CECO Door Products. 2. Curries Company. 3. Steelcraft. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Comtnercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSUSDI A250.8. B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot -dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Steel Stiffened 3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Steel Stiffened a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire -protection and temperature -rise ratings indicated. 3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. 4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Manufacturers Basis of Design: 1. CECO Door Products Steel -Stiffened: Medallion Series. 2. Curries Company Steel -Stiffened: 747 Series. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot -dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of knock down types, with 'closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors (up to 48 inches in width): Minimum 14 gauge (0.067 - inch -1.7 -mm) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors (48 inches and up in width): Minimum 12 gauge (0.081 - inch -2.7 -mm) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 -inch -1.3 -mm) thick steel sheet. 6. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products SQ/SU/SR Series. b. Curries Company M/G Series. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of slip-on drywall types, with "closed and tight" miter seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Steel Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 -inch -1.3 -mm) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for openings up to 48 inches in width: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 -inch -1.3 -mm) thick steel sheet.] 5. Frames for openings 48 inches and wider in width: Minimum 14 gauge (0.067 -inch -1.7- mm) thick steel sheet.] 6. Frames for Wood Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 -inch -1.3 -mm-) thick steel sheet. 7. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 -inch -1.3 -mm-) thick steel sheet. 8. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products BQBU/DQ/DUBR/DR Series (Drywall Profile). b. CECO Door Products SQ/SU/SR Series (Masonry Profile). c. Curries Company C/CM/CG Series (Drywall Profile). d. Curries Company M/G Series (Masonry Profile). D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated. E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock -Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Windstorm Opening Anchors: Types as tested and required for indicated wall types to meet specified wind load design criteria. 5. FEMA 361 Storm Shelter Anchors: Masonry T-shaped, wire masonry type, or existing opening type anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick. C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.6 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator's shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated. B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20 gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048 - inch -thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated fmish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre -finished door paint color where applicable. E. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the hollow metal door manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Factory Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors as indicated. Doors with factory installed glass to include all of the required glazing material. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install glazing where indicated. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. 4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". D. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening. 3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48 -inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations. 5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations. 7. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements. 8. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions. 10. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non -template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.). C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI -117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non -template, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post -installed expansion anchors. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar. 4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER B. Remove grout and other bonding material installation. JULY 25, 2014 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS from hollow metal work immediately after C. Prime -Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust -inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 081216 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pre -finished aluminum door frames for interior use. 2. Pre-fmished aluminum framing systems for interior use. 3. Pre -finished aluminum doors for interior use. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in interior aluminum doors. 2. Division 08 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront" for glazed aluminum doors and framing used in exterior walls and vestibule enclosures. 3. Division 08 Sections "Flush Wood Doors", "Clad Wood Doors", and "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for wood doors used in interior aluminum frames. 4. Division 08 Sections "Door Hardware" and "Access Control Hardware" for door hardware used on interior aluminum doors and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire -resistance rating, and finishes. C. Templates: Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the interior aluminum door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. D. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. Include requirements for steel framing at partitions for fit and securing of frames, partition widths and tolerances, direction of framing members, clips and attachments. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 5. Details of accessories. 6. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 081216 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 7. Elevations of each door design. 8. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 9. Details of preparations for power, signal, and control systems. E. Samples for Verification: Provide at the request of architect, prepared Samples as indicated below: 1. Framing Member: 12 inches long. 2. Comer Fabrication: 12 -by -12 -inch -long, full-size window corner, including full-size sections of extrusions with factory -applied color finish. 3. Aluminum chips in full range manufacturer's standard finishes for architect's color selection. F. Interior Aluminum Door and Frame Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate with Door Hardware schedule and glazing. G. Informational Submittals 1. Certificates of Compliance: Submit any product test report or information necessary to indicate compliance with this specification section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain interior aluminum frames and doors through one source from a single qualified manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in the manufacturing of interior aluminum framing systems and doors with a minimum five (5) years successful in-service performance providing product similar to those indicated for this project, including pre -engineering and pre- fabricating all components of aluminum framing systems and doors. C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer with a minimum five years (5) experience who has completed aluminum framing systems and door installations similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Aesthetic Effects: Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL 10C. 1. Provide labels permanently fastened on each frame or door within size limits established by NFPA and the testing authority. F. Fire -Rated, Borrowed -Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Label each individual glazed lite. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 081216 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Smoke -Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105. H. Pre -Installation Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing interior aluminum frames and doors and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver interior aluminum frames and doors individually protective wrapped within cartons and marked for the corresponding scheduled opening. Do not bulk pack frames. B. Inspect frames upon delivery for damage. 1. Repair minor damage to pre -finished products as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Replace frames that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. C. Store interior aluminum frames and doors at Project site under cover and as near as possible to final installation location. Do not use covering material that will cause discoloration of aluminum finish. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of interior aluminum frame openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings submittals. B. Do not install aluminum frames and doors until area of work has been completely enclosed and interior is protected from the elements. C. Maintain temperature and humidity in areas of installation within reasonable limits, as close as possible to final occupancy standards. If necessary, provide artificial heating, cooling and ventilation to maintain required environmental conditions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship upon final completion and acceptance of Work in this section. 1. Warrant framing and door finishes against defects and excessive fading and non- uniformity M color for a period of 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 081216 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Frameworks Manufacturing. B. Substitutions: Material from altemate interior aluminum framing system and door fabricators will not be accepted on jobsite without prior written and sample approval in accordance with requirements specified in Division 01 and at the discretion of Architect and their designated openings consultant. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements. B. INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 1. Provide interior aluminum framing components complying with dimensions, profiles, and relationships to adjoining work of components as indicated on Drawings. Provide frames that are adjustable for partition types and throat openings, or that are fitted to each partition type, meeting the throat opening and required clearances per frame manufacturer's recommendations. Reinforce for specified hinges, strikes, and closers 2. Type I Framing System: Provide frames with the following characteristics: a. Rectilinear design. b. 1-1/2 inch face profile. c. Snap on trim: 1) 2 inch. d. .062 inch rabbet wall thickness. e. Standard throat sizes (drywall partition thickness): 3-1/2", 3-3/4", 4-5/8", 4-7/8", 5- 1/4", 5-1/2", 6-1/8" and 7-1/4". 3. Glass Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, designed for glass thickness indicated with removable snap -in casing trim, glazing stops, and door stops without exposed fasteners. 4. Fire Rated Frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency. Maximum fire rating required is 20 minutes (without hosestream test). C. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS 1. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of type and design indicated, not less than 0.062 inch thick material. 2. Aluminum Stile & Rail Type Swinging Doors: Door stiles and rails to have tubular design with the following characteristics: a. Stiles: 1) Medium Stile (3-3/4"). INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 081216 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Rails: 3. Snap -in stops with factory applied glazing gaskets for 1/4", 3/8", or 1/2" thick glass. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals. C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated. D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section, "Glazing." E. Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section, "Door Hardware". 2.4 FABRICATION A. FRAME CONSTRUCTION 1. Factory pre -engineer and pre-cut interior aluminum frame components to the greatest extent practical. Linear glazing components fabricated in the field are not allowed. Allow for 2 inches excess vertical length for scribing to suit floor conditions. Machine jambs and prepare for hardware, with concealed plates, drilled and tapped as required, fastened in frame with concealed screws. 2. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for precise joints at butt or mitered connections. 3. Hardware Preparation: Factory interior aluminum frames to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates as specified in Division 08 Section, "Door Hardware." a. Reinforce frames to receive surface mounted door hardware. Machine jambs and prepare for hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required and fastened within frame with concealed screws. b. Locate hardware as indicated. c. Coordinate locations of conduit, wiring boxes, and power transfers for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. 4. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. 5. Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. B. DOOR CONSTRUCTION 1. Factory pre -engineer aluminum doors and components to the greatest extent practical. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 081216 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Hardware Preparation: Factory interior aluminum doors to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates as specified in Division 08 Section, "Door Hardware." a. Reinforce doors to receive surface mounted door hardware. Machine and prepare for hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required and fastened within door with concealed screws. b. Locate hardware as indicated. c. Coordinate locations of conduit and power transfers for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. 3. Clearances for Non -Fire -Rated Door Frames: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. 4. Fabricate kits for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products' for recommendations for apply and designated finishes. Exposed surfaces to be free of scratches and other serious blemishes. B. Factory finish extruded frame components so that any part exposed to view upon completion of installation will be uniform in finish and color. C. Color anodic coating: Comply with AAMA 608.1. 1. Class 2, AAM12C22A34 color coating electrolytically deposited, 0.4-0.7 mill thickness minimum. a. Color: Bronze anodized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by specified frame throat sizes. C. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to frame and door manufacturer for pre-cut openings. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 081216 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install and set interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. At fire -protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. B. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths with no component less than 48 inches. 1. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid at 48 inches on center maximum, using #6 sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer. 2. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. 3. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap -in or trim members. 4. Do not use screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. B. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AMNIA 609 & 610. C. Touch up marred areas so that touch up is not visible from a distance of 48 inches. Remove and replace frames that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide protection as required to assure that frames will be without damage or deterioration upon substantial completion of the project. END OF SECTION 081216 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 081216 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 083313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Counter doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for fmish painting of factory -primed doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of coiling counter door and accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. 3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. 4. Show locations of controls, locking devices, detectors or replaceable fusible links, and other accessories. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory -applied finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. COILING COUNTER DOORS 083313 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Curtain slats. 2. Bottom bar. 3. Guides. 4. Brackets. 5. Hood. 6. Locking device(s). 7. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire -rated and that exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For coiling counter doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than twohours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain coiling counter doors from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 COUNTER DOOR ASSEMBLY <Insert drawing designation> A. Counter Door: Coiling counter door fouued with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACME Rollin COILING COUNTER DOORS 083313 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. c. Alumatec Pacific Products. d. Amur Garage Doors. e. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. f. g. Clopay Building Products. h. Cookson Company. i. Cornell Iron Works- Inc. j. Lawrence Roll_UuDeors,_Inc. k. McKeon Roiling Steel Door Com 1. Metro Door. m. Overhead Door Corporation. n. OM] Security So]utions. o. Raynor. p. Wavne-Dalton Corp. q. B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1. Include tamperproof cycle counter. C. Door Curtain MaterialStainless steel. D. Door Curtain SlatsFlat profile slats 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm center -to -center height. E. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, stainless steeland finished to match door . F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Stainless steelwith exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal -to -metal contact and to minimize operational noise. G. Hood: Stainless steel. 1. Shape: Square. 2. Mounting: Face of wall. H. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. I. Manual Door Operator: Chain -hoist operator. J. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with push/pull handlespull-down strap K. Door Finish: 1. Stainless -Steel Finish: No. 2B (bright, cold rolled). 2. Interior Curtain -Slat Facing: Match fmish of exterior curtain -slat face. COILING COUNTER DOORS 083313 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate coiling counter -door curtain of interlocking metal slats in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Stainless -Steel Door Curtain Slats: ASTM A 666, Type 304; sheet thickness of 0.025 inch (0.64 min); and as required. B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 2.5 HOODS A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface -mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Stainless Steel: 0.025 -inch- (0.64 -mm-) thick stainless-steel sheet, Type 304, complying with ASTM A 666. 2.6 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side -locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. 2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push -up -operated or emergency -operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, fmished to match door. B. Pull -Down Strap: Provide pull-down straps for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high. 2.8 COUNTER DOOR ACCESSORIES A. Integral Metal Sill: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of Type 304 stainless steel in manufacturer's standard thickness with [No. 4] finish. COILING COUNTER DOORS 083313 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.9 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable -tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease -sealed bearings or self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. 2.10 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS 2.11 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. C. Bright, Cold -Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. COILING COUNTER DOORS 083313 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install coiling counter doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Install coiling counter doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door. C. Fire -Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80. D. Smoke -Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 80 and NFPA 105. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm -connected fire -release system. Reset door -closing mechanism after successful test. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain coiling counter doors. END OF SECTION 083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 083313 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 08 35 13 ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Model: FireGuard B. Division 0 and Division 1, as indexed, apply to this section. C. Furnish and install all horizontal sliding, accordion -type fire doors shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All headers, support structures, surrounding insulation, jambs, storage pockets, pocket doors, ac- cess doors, blocking and trim shall be furnished and installed by other sections. B. All electrical wire, wiring, conduit and electrical boxes shall be furnished and installed by electri- cal section. C. Drilling/placement of anchorage points into pre or post tensioned decks, weld- ing/punching/drilling steel members and all drywall work. D. All track, soffit, chain guide and wall mounted striker posts shall be painted by Section 09900. Color shall be selected by the architect. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation shall be performed by factory trained and certified installers with a minimum of three years experience installing accordion -type fire doors. B. Fire doors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for ratings as indicated, when tested in ac- cordance with the requirements of UL 10B and NFPA252. C. Automatic closing system shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with the re- quirements of UL 864 and be intended for use with assembly in compliance with NFPA 80, Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2.1. D. Fire doors used for smoke and draft control shall bear the "S" mark on the fire door label and shall have an air leakage of less than 3 ft3/ft2 at 0.1 inch of water column pressure when tested in accordance with UL 1784 with an artificial bottom seal. E. Fire doors used at the point of access to an elevator shall bear the "E" mark on the fire door label and shall have an air leakage of less than 3 ft3/ft2 at 0.1 inch of water column pressure when test- ed in accordance with UL 1784 without an artificial bottom seal. F. Fire doors shall be capable of resisting an air pressure differential up to .05 inches of water col- umn. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01300 - Shop Drawings and Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical literature; include UL listing data. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction and installation details and dimensions, including layout, electrical requirements, required stacking depth, height of header above finished floor, and re- quirements for anchorage and support of each door. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operating manual, troubleshooting and repair methods, and wiring diagrams shall be provided as part of project close out procedure. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver to the job site in manufacturer's original, unopened package. 1.06 COORDINATION BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR A. Coordinate with the following: 1. Fire Alarm system. 2. Electrical. 3. Floor and ceiling finish. B. Assure accurate installation of header, jamb, and trim. Provide field dimensions for fabrication. Supervise unloading and handling of materials. C. Permanent power shall be in-place and ready for final connection when fire doors are erected. As- sure access to and proper clearance for motor operators. D. After testing the fire alarm system, automatic -closing fire doors shall be re -set to the original po- sitions. E. Store boxes flat (not more than three high) in a dry area and protect from elements that may dam- age materials. Replace damaged materials at no cost to the owner. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Materials and installation shall be warranted against defects in workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER AND MODEL A. bASIS OF Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Won -Door Fire Guard or comparable product. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Won -Door Corp., 1865 South 3480 West Salt Lake City, UT, Phone: 800 453-8494, Fax: (801) 977-9749, www.wondoor.com/ B. Horizontal sliding accordion -type fire doors shall be Won -Door FireGuard model FG 180 minute as manufactured by Won -Door Corporation, Salt Lake City, Utah. C. 2.02 ACCORDION FIRE DOORS - GENERAL A. Fire Rating: Fire doors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory as special purpose fire doors having a 180 minute minute fire -resistive rating in accordance with the requirements of UL 10B and NFPA 252. B. Closing and Opening Operation: Automatic Closing System shall be a Microprocessor -based system rated to UL864 (Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems) and shall com- mence closing upon activation by fire alaim system and/or by low battery charge. 1. Obstruction Detection: Contact with an obstruction shall cause the door to stop, reverse enough to remove pressure on the leading edge, pause, and then re -close when in an alarm condition. 2. While the door is opening under motor power, constant pressure to the leading edge in the di- rection of opening shall cause the door to continue to open until the leading edge is released. This is termed motor -assisted opening. 3. Constant pressure to the leading edge while not under motor power shall prevent motor oper- ation and allow the door to be opened manually. C. Exit Hardware Operation: Provide fire exit hardware on both sides of door. 1. In emergency mode, a slight pressure on the hardware will cause the door to open a minimum of 32 inches, pause for 3 seconds, and then automatically close. 2. The open distance shall be field programmable, up to the entire opening width, if the local au- thority requires an opening larger than 32 inches. 3. The pause before re -close shall be field programmable, up to 30 seconds, if the local authority requires a longer pause time. 4. The exit hardware shall have the ability when not in the emergency (fire) mode or the securi- ty (lock) mode to be used to open the door and move it back into the storage pocket. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Door Construction: Two parallel, accordion -type walls of panels independently suspended with no floor tracks, pantographs or interconnections except at the lead -post. 1. Panels: 24 gauge steel, V -grooved; Modular design; Capable of in-place repair. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Perimeter Seals: shall consist of continuous extruded vinyl sweeps attached to the top and bottom of the fire door to form a smoke and draft seal. 3. Hanging Weight: 5.5 pounds per sq. ft. when extended across the opening. 4. Finish: All steel parts factory -applied enamel. 5. Color: Manufacturer's standard platinum. B. Suspension System: Two tracks, on 8 inch centers, attached to overhead structural support. 1. Tracks: 14 gauge cold rolled steel or .125 aluminum. 2. Panel Hangers: Every other panel individually suspended from a steel hanger pin and a 1/4 inch ball bearing roller. 3. Lead Post Hangers: 8 wheel ball bearing trolley. C. Power Supply: 12 -volt maintenance -free DC battery, automatically maintained at capacity by continuous charger, 120 V AC. D. Automatic Closing System shall be listed to UL864 including capability to send and receive sig- nals from the Fire Control Panel, and shall consist of the following: 1. Microprocessor Based Electronic Control box with the ability to: a. Monitor dual power sources continually for peak performance including 1) Detect a missing battery, bad battery, or low battery condition 2) Detect if the charging circuit is bad 3) Detect fuse failures 4) Detect high or low AC conditions b. Monitor the health of the drive train. c. Monitor inputs including: 1) Sticky door block, exit hardware, patron hardware and key switches. 2) Key switch mis-wires where key open and key close are on simultaneously. d. Run a "watch dog" monitoring circuit which will force a software restart in the event of software hangs, including tracking number of resets for diagnostic purposes. e. Record the number of door closes, openings, lost communication with external micropro- cessors, and manual resets. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS f. Monitor ambient temperature and lockout the operating devices when the environment at the door becomes untenable. g. Enter a security mode to help control access through the opening. h. Withstand voltages up to 120 AC on the fire alarm input circuit without damage includ- ing the ability to indicate that the alarm circuit has not been wired as a dry contact, "no voltage" circuit when errant voltages are applied to the circuit. i. Communicate with other microprocessors in the assembly via an intemal buss system. j. Indicate faults or supervised information both locally and at a remote location. 2. Motor Operator Assembly including: A DC gear motor, drive sprocket, clutch, and position sensors. The motor shall drive the fire door by means of a chain attached to a stabilizer bar trolley. The motor shall be rated for continuous use with unlimited cycle duty. 3. If a key switch is NOT used, a door control momentary rocker switch shall be mounted on one side of the door and shall function as follows: a. Pressing the upper portion shall close the door and/or clear fault conditions. b. Pressing the lower portion of the switch shall open the door and/or temporarily mute the local horn. 4. Leading Edge Obstruction Detector shall be pressure sensitive such that contact with an ob- struction shall cause the door to stop, pause for 3 seconds, then re -close when in alarm mode. The obstruction detection system shall be fully functional at all times. 5. Exit Hardware shall be located on both sides of the fire door. 6. Doors installed at the point of access to an elevator ("E" label) shall include the following ex- tras: track seals, anti -sway brackets every five feet or less across the opening, and foil tape between the panels and the smoke liner. 2.04 OPTIONS 2.05 RELATED CONSTRUCTION A. Track Support Construction: Provide supports attached to structure and mounting surface for tracks; comply with door manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Headers, if furnished & installed by the general contractor or other sections, shall be parallel with the finished floor within +/- 1/8"tolerance over the entire length of the opening. B. Pocket Construction: Provide pocket for concealment of accordion folding fire door when open; comply with door manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to ensure pocket and soffit are built to the dimensions specified, plumb and level. C. Pocket Door: Maintain full pocket clear width when pocket door is open. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Striker Recess: Mount 16 gauge steel striker in wall recess deep enough to prevent striker from protruding beyond face of wall; construct recess to maintain fire rating of wall. PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that adjacent construction is suitable for installation of door. B. Verify that electrical utilities have been installed and are accessible. C. Verify that door opening is plumb and header is level and of correct dimensions. D. Notify Architect of any unacceptable conditions or varying dimensions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, shop drawings, and NFPA 80. B. Install fire doors plumb and level. C. Installation shall be performed by factory trained and certified installers with a minimum of three year's experience installing electrically operated accordion folding fire doors. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth, quiet, non-binding operation. B. Test door closing functions under all anticipated conditions. C. Verify that all operations are functional and meet the requirements of the authorities having juris- diction. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces using manufacturer's recommended means and methods. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage 3.06 STORAGE OF WASTE AND RECYLING A. Store and recycle waste in accordance with Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal. END OF SECTION ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 083513 - FOLDING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Panel folding doors. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for folding doors. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and installation details. 2. Include clearances required for operationaccess requirements,storage pockets and pocket doors, and accessory items. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each fire -rated folding door, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For folding doors to include in operation and maintenance manuals. FOLDING DOORS 083513 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer of fire -rated folding doors. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install folding doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for building occupants after completion of construction during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL FOLDING DOORS A. Description: Top -supported, horizontal -sliding, manually operated panel folding doors, with panels joined by continuous hinge connectors for the full height of panels. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American FoldingDoor Company, Inc. b. c. I-Iufcor, Inc. d. Pa e. Won -Door C f. Wood fold Milt, ncNanawall. B. Core Material and Thickness: Manufacturer's standard. C. Nominal Panel Width: 4 inches (100 mm). D. Panel Facing: Complying with the following• 1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame -Spread Index: [25] or less. b. Smoke -Developed Index: [50] or less. c. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . E. Carriers: Four-wheel carriers at lead post and two -wheel carriers at intermediate spacing, as necessary for size and weight of partition, to ensure secure, easy, and quiet operation. F. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard metal track, made of extruded aluminum or formed steel with factory -applied, corrosion -resistant finish. Limit track deflection, independent of structural FOLDING DOORS 083513 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS supporting system, to no more than 80 percent of bottom clearance. Design and fabricate track to support operation without damage to track, folding unit, or adjacent surfaces; and with the following features: 1. Mounting: Recessedmounted. 2. Ceiling Guard: Metal guard to protect adjacent ceiling surfaces from damage by door operation; with fmish matching other exposed metal. 3. Pivot Switch: To change track direction. G. Hinge Connector: Manufacturer's standard extruded -vinyl hinge connector. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty, manually operated metal pulls and latches as follows: 1. Finish: Satin stainless steel. 2. Latch: Operable from both sides of closed door. 3. Foot Bolts: On lead post where indicated. Secure to post to avoid interference with seals. I. Jamb Molding: Manufacturer's molding at closing jamb as required for light -tight jamb closure. 1. Material: Metal, in manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Jamb Strip: Nonferrous for end -opening doors to ensure tight closure by engaging rubber bumper on lead post. J. Tiebacks: To maintain door in stacked position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. For folding doors supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices. Furnish installers of other work with templates and drawings indicating locations of anchorage devices and similar items. B. Fire -Rated Folding Doors: Level floor with header in path of fire -rated folding doors to tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 nun) across opening; grind or fill floor as necessary. FOLDING DOORS 083513 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install folding doors complying with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install track in one piece. 1. Fire -Rated Folding Doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for installation. B. Standard Floor Clearances: 1/4 to 3/4 inch (6.4 to 19 mm) maximum (above floor finish). 1. Fire -Rated Folding Doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for floor clearances. C. Fire -Rated Folding Doors: Coordinate provisions for sensing devices[, electrical service,] and final connections for fire -rated folding doors. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust units to ensure smooth, quiet operation without warping or binding. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. 1. Fire -Rated Folding Doors: Verify that all operations are functional and comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pocket Doors: Adjust to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire -rated folding doors. END OF SECTION 083513 FOLDING DOORS 083513 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 08 35 13.23 ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Model: FireGuard B. Division 0 and Division 1, as indexed, apply to this section. C. Furnish and install all horizontal sliding, accordion -type fire doors shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All headers, support structures, surrounding insulation, jambs, storage pockets, pocket doors, ac- cess doors, blocking and trim shall be fumished and installed by other sections. B. All electrical wire, wiring, conduit and electrical boxes shall be famished and installed by electri- cal section. C. Drilling/placement of anchorage points into pre or post tensioned decks, weld- ing/punching/drilling steel members and all drywall work. D. AH track, soffit, chain guide and wall mounted striker posts shall be painted by Section 09900. Color shall be selected by the architect. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation shall be performed by factory trained and certified installers with a minimum of three years experience installing accordion -type fire doors. B. Fire doors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for ratings as indicated, when tested in ac- cordance with the requirements of UL 10B and NFPA252. C. Automatic closing system shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with the re- quirements of UL 864 and be intended for use with assembly in compliance with NFPA 80, Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2.1. D. Fire doors used for smoke and draft control shall bear the "S" mark on the fire door label and shall have an air leakage of less than 3 ft3/ft2 at 0.1 inch of water column pressure when tested in accordance with UL 1784 with an artificial bottom seal. E. Fire doors used at the point of access to an elevator shall bear the "E" mark on the fire door label and shall have an air leakage of less than 3 ft3/ft2 at 0.1 inch of water column pressure when test- ed in accordance with UL 1784 without an artificial bottom seal. F. Fire doors shall be capable of resisting an air pressure differential up to .05 inches of water col- umn. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01300 - Shop Drawings and Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical literature; include UL listing data. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction and installation details and dimensions, including layout, electrical requirements, required stacking depth, height of header above finished floor, and re- quirements for anchorage and support of each door. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operating manual, troubleshooting and repair methods, and wiring diagrams shall be provided as part of project close out procedure. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver to the job site in manufacturer's original, unopened package. 1.06 COORDINATION BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR A. Coordinate with the following: 1. Fire Alarm system. 2. Electrical. 3. Floor and ceiling finish. B. Assure accurate installation of header, jamb, and trim. Provide field dimensions for fabrication. Supervise unloading and handling of materials. C. Permanent power shall be in-place and ready for final connection when fire doors are erected. As- sure access to and proper clearance for motor operators. D. After testing the fire alarm system, automatic -closing fire doors shall be re -set to the original po- sitions. E. Store boxes flat (not more than three high) in a dry area and protect from elements that may dam- age materials. Replace damaged materials at no cost to the owner. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Materials and installation shall be warranted against defects in workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER AND MODEL A. bASIS OF Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Won -Door Fire Guard or comparable product. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Won -Door Corp., 1865 South 3480 West Salt Lake City, UT, Phone: 800 453-8494, Fax: (801) 977-9749, www.wondoor.com/ B. Horizontal sliding accordion -type fire doors shall be Won -Door FireGuard model FG 180 minute as manufactured by Won -Door Corporation, Salt Lake City, Utah. C. 2.02 ACCORDION FIRE DOORS - GENERAL A. Fire Rating: Fire doors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory as special purpose fire doors having a 180 minute minute fire -resistive rating in accordance with the requirements of UL 10B and NEPA 252. B. Closing and Opening Operation: Automatic Closing System shall be a Microprocessor -based system rated to UL864 (Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems) and shall com- mence closing upon activation by fire alarm system and/or by low battery charge. 1. Obstruction Detection: Contact with an obstruction shall cause the door to stop, reverse enough to remove pressure on the leading edge, pause, and then re -close when in an alarm condition. 2. While the door is opening under motor power, constant pressure to the leading edge in the di- rection of opening shall cause the door to continue to open until the leading edge is released. This is termed motor -assisted opening. 3. Constant pressure to the leading edge while not under motor power shall prevent motor oper- ation and allow the door to be opened manually. C. Exit Hardware Operation: Provide fire exit hardware on both sides of door. 1. In emergency mode, a slight pressure on the hardware will cause the door to open a minimum of 32 inches, pause for 3 seconds, and then automatically close. 2. The open distance shall be field programmable, up to the entire opening width, if the local au- thority requires an opening larger than 32 inches. 3. The pause before re -close shall be field programmable, up to 30 seconds, if the local authority requires a longer pause time. 4. The exit hardware shall have the ability when not in the emergency (fire) mode or the securi- ty (lock) mode to be used to open the door and move it back into the storage pocket. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Door Construction: Two parallel, accordion -type walls of panels independently suspended with no floor tracks, pantographs or interconnections except at the lead -post. 1. Panels 24 gauge steel, V -grooved; Modular design; Capable of in-place repair. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Perimeter Seals: shall consist of continuous extruded vinyl sweeps attached to the top and bottom of the fire door to form a smoke and draft seal. 3. Hanging Weight: 5.5 pounds per sq. ft. when extended across the opening. 4. Finish: All steel parts factory -applied enamel. 5. Color: Manufacturer's standard platinum. B. Suspension System: Two tracks, on 8 inch centers, attached to overhead structural support. 1. Tracks: 14 gauge cold rolled steel or .125 aluminum. 2. Panel Hangers: Every other panel individually suspended from a steel hanger pin and a 1/4 inch ball bearing roller. 3. Lead Post Hangers: 8 wheel ball bearing trolley. C. Power Supply: 12 -volt maintenance -free DC battery, automatically maintained at capacity by continuous charger, 120 V AC. D. Automatic Closing System shall be listed to UL864 including capability to send and receive sig- nals from the Fire Control Panel, and shall consist of the following: 1. Microprocessor Based Electronic Control box with the ability to: a. Monitor dual power sources continually for peak performance including 1) Detect a missing battery, bad battery, or low battery condition 2) Detect if the charging circuit is bad 3) Detect fuse failures 4) Detect high or low AC conditions b. Monitor the health of the drive train. c. Monitor inputs including: 1) Sticky door block, exit hardware, patron hardware and key switches. 2) ICey switch mis-wires where key open and key close are on simultaneously. d. Run a "watch dog" monitoring circuit which will force a software restart in the event of software hangs, including tracking number of resets for diagnostic purposes. e. Record the number of door closes, openings, lost communication with external micropro- cessors, and manual resets. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS f. Monitor ambient temperature and lockout the operating devices when the environment at the door becomes untenable. g. Enter a security mode to help control access through the opening. h. Withstand voltages up to 120 AC on the fire alarm input circuit without damage includ- ing the ability to indicate that the alarm circuit has not been wired as a dry contact, "no voltage" circuit when errant voltages are applied to the circuit. i. Communicate with other microprocessors in the assembly via an internal buss system. j. Indicate faults or supervised information both locally and at a remote location. 2. Motor Operator Assembly including: A DC gear motor, drive sprocket, clutch, and position sensors. The motor shall drive the fire door by means of a chain attached to a stabilizer bar trolley. The motor shall be rated for continuous use with unlimited cycle duty. 3. If a key switch is NOT used, a door control momentary rocker switch shall be mounted on one side of the door and shall function as follows: a. Pressing the upper portion shall close the door and/or clear fault conditions. b. Pressing the lower portion of the switch shall open the door and/or temporarily mute the local horn. 4. Leading Edge Obstruction Detector shall be pressure sensitive such that contact with an ob- struction shall cause the door to stop, pause for 3 seconds, then re -close when in alarm mode. The obstruction detection system shall be fully functional at all times. 5. Exit Hardware shall be located on both sides of the fire door. 6. Doors installed at the point of access to an elevator ("E" label) shall include the following ex- tras: track seals, anti -sway brackets every five feet or less across the opening, and foil tape between the panels and the smoke liner. 2.04 OPTIONS 2.05 RELATED CONS (RUCTION A. Track Support Construction: Provide supports attached to structure and mounting surface for tracks; comply with door manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Headers, if furnished & installed by the general contractor or other sections, shall be parallel with the finished floor within +/- 1/8"tolerance over the entire length of the opening. B. Pocket Construction: Provide pocket for concealment of accordion folding fire door when open; comply with door manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to ensure pocket and soffit are built to the dimensions specified, plumb and level. C. Pocket Door: Maintain full pocket clear width when pocket door is open. ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Striker Recess: Mount 16 gauge steel striker in wall recess deep enough to prevent striker from protruding beyond face of wall; construct recess to maintain fire rating of wall. PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that adjacent construction is suitable for installation of door. B. Verify that electrical utilities have been installed and are accessible. C. Verify that door opening is plumb and header is level and of correct dimensions. D. Notify Architect of any unacceptable conditions or varying dimensions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, shop drawings, and NFPA 80. B. Install fire doors plumb and level. C. Installation shall be performed by factory trained and certified installers with a minimum of three year's experience installing electrically operated accordion folding fire doors. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth, quiet, non-binding operation. B. Test door closing functions under all anticipated conditions. C. Verify that all operations are functional and meet the requirements of the authorities having juris- diction. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces using manufacturer's recommended means and methods. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage. 3.06 STORAGE OF WASTE AND RECYLING A. Store and recycle waste in accordance with Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal. END OF SECTION ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 35 13 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 08 51 13 —ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum framed storefront windows for exterior locations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum -framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing -to -glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum -framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Loads: ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 140 mph. b. Importance Factor: 1.15. c. Exposure Category: B. 2. Seismic Loads: None. 3. Blast Loads: None. D. Deflection of Framing Members: I . Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E. Structural -Test Performance: Provide exterior aluminum -framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: I. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide exterior aluminum -framed systems that pass missile -impact and cyclic -pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 or AAMA 506. 1. Large -Missile Impact: For aluminum -framed systems located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small -Missile Impact: For aluminum -framed systems located more than 30 feet above grade. G. Florida Building Code Product Approval: Provide exterior aluminum -framed systems that have a current "Product Approval" as evidenced by a Notice of Acceptance from the Florida Department of Community Affairs or Miami -Dade County for Large Missile Impact Rated at the wind loads indicated on the Drawings. H. Air Infiltration: Provide exterior aluminum -framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static -air -pressure difference of 1.571bf/sq. ft. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide exterior aluminum -framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static -air -pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS J. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide exterior aluminum -framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes. K. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior aluminum -framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal - surface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: 0 deg F. 3. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum - framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum -framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical -to -horizontal intersection of aluminum -framed systems, made from 12 -inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. F. Delegated -Design Submittal: For aluminum -framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum -framed systems. 2. Include design calculations. G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. H. Welding certificates. I. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant. J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum -framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. K. Source quality -control reports. L. Field quality -control reports. M. Maintenance Data: For aluminum -framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. N. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum -framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. D. Quality -Control Program for Structural -Sealant -Glazed System: Develop quality control program specifically for Project. Document quality -control procedures and verify results for aluminum -framed systems. Comply with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, system material -qualification procedures, preconstruction sealant -testing program, procedures for system fabrication and installation, and intervals of reviews and checks. E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: For structural -sealant -glazed systems, perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by aluminum -framed systems. 1. Test a minimum five samples each of metal, glazing, and other material. 2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed systems. 3. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials. G. Source Limitations for Aluminum -Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. H. Structural -Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing" for design and installation of structural -sealant -glazed systems. 1. Structural -Sealant Joints: Design reviewed and approved by structural -sealant manufacturer. J. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum -framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Boyd Aluminum Manufacturing. 2. Custom Window Company. 3. EFCO Corporation; a Pella company. 4. Fleetwood Windows & Doors. 5. Graham Architectural Products Corp. 6. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 7. Peerless Products Inc. 8. Quaker Windows Products Co.Thermal Windows, Inc. 9. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. 10. YKK AP America Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Window Certification: AMMA certified with label attached to each window. B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows: 1. Minimum Performance Class: LC. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 25. C. Condensation -Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces. E. Windbome-Debris Resistance: Capable of resisting impact from windborne debris based on testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion -resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC- SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008. 3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011. 2.4 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Nonthermal. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides as well as structural silicone sealant secondary retainer as required to comply with impact -resistance requirements. 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system, fabricated from stainless steel. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized east -iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153. E. Concealed Flashing: Dead -soft, 0.018 -inch -thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240 of type recommended by manufacturer. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.5 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. E. Glazing Sealants: For structural -sealant -glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows: I . Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single -component neutral -curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural -sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum -framed systems indicated. a. Color: Black. 2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and 0; single -component neutral -curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural -sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum -framed -system manufacturers for this use. a. Color: Matching structural sealant. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Structural -Sealant -Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures. F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High -Performance Organic Finish: 3 -coat fiuoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Use at units that act as exterior enclosure. 2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A3 1, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 1. Use at locations where all portions of unit are within interior spaces. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate structural -sealant - glazed systems. B. Structural -Sealant -Glazed Systems: Perform quality -control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations, including, but not limited to, system material -qualification procedures, sealant testing, and system fabrication reviews and checks. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Structural -sealant -glazed system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum -framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Structural -Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. a. Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," in ASTM C 1401, Appendix X2, shall be used. 1) A minimum of two areas on each building face shall be tested. 2) Repair installation areas damaged by testing. 2. Structural -Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of aluminum -framed systems is complete, structural -sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. 3. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09 cf n/sq. ft., of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static - air -pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. 4. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, aluminum -framed systems shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Aluminum -framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning. B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the folio ng: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware; power supplies, back-ups and surge protection. 3. Automatic operators. 4. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware Schedule". 2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 3. Division 08 Section "Interior Aluminum Doors and Frames". 4. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors". 5. Division 08 Section "Automatic Door Operators". 6. Division 08 Section "Access Control Hardware". D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 6. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 — Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C —Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. Include the following: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Division 26 Electrical Sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing fmal keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Hurricane Resistant Openings (State of Florida): Within the State of Florida, provide copy of current State of Florida Product Approval or Metro -Dade County Notice of Acceptance (NOA) as proof of compliance that doors, frames and hardware for exterior opening assemblies have been tested and approved for use at the wind load and design pressure level requirements specified for the Project. a. Hurricane Resistant Components (State of Florida): Within the State of Florida, provide copy of independent, third party certified listing to ANSI A250.13. 2. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. G. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following: 1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL -10C. a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. H. Pre -Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing -in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre -wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in -field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond nounal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closers. 4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. 1. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuekles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3'0": 4-1/2" standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3'1" to 4'0": 5" standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products (MK). B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BB-MA A156.26 certified continuous geared hinge with minimum 0.120 -inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non -handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount (with or without inset), full surface, or half surface, in standard and heavy duty models, as specified in the Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for use on up to and including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Factory cut hinges for door size and provide with removable service power transfer panel where indicated at electrified openings. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Electrified Quick Connect Continuous Geared Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer continuous geared hinges with a 12" removable service panel cutout accessible without de - mounting door from the frame. Furnish with MolexTM standardized plug connectors with sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through -door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries (BO) - SER -QC (# of wires) Option. b. McKinney Products (MK) - SER -QC (# wires) Option. c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE) - SER -QC (# wires) Option. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSIBHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified automatic, self -latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8" in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Door Controls International (DC). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSBHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2 -inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2 -inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as required. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burns Manufacturing (BU). 2) Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 3) Trimco (TC). 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU). b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA). DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Keyway: Manufacturer's Standard. D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Top Master Key: One (1) 2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3) 3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2) 4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2) 5. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10) F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. G. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. H. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3 -way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK). I. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into "Key Wizard" software. 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSIBHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets. Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum formed steel case and be field -reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim (including knobs, levers, escutcheons, roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti -friction stainless steel latchbolt, and a full 1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) — ML2000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) — 8200 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) — 8800FL Series. B. Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets. 2.7 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSIBHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series. 2.1 ELECTROMECHANICAL CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. Electrified Conventional Push Rail Devices (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified below. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series. B. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device options including: electric latch retraction , electric dogging, outside door trim control, exit alarm, delayed egress, latchbolt monitoring, lock/unlock status monitoring, touchbar monitoring and request -to -exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified exit devices standard as fail secure. 2.2 DOOR CLOSERS A. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSIBHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non -handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC6000 Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 8500 Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1431 Series. d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 3500 Series. 2.3 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire -rated door assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency. B. Electrohydraulic Door Operators: Self-contained low-pressure units with rack and pinion design contained within a cast aluminum housing. Door closing speed controlled by independent hydraulic adjustment valves in the sweep and latch range of the closing cycle. Operator is to provide conventional door closer opening and closing forces unless the power operator motor is activated. Unit is to include an adjustable hydraulic backcheck valve to cushion the door speed if opened violently. Non -handed units for both push and pull side applications. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Standard: Certified ANSIBHMA A156.19. 1. Performance Requirements: a. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. b. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening. E. Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors. F. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSIBHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. On-off switch to control power to be key switch operated. G. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds. H. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts. Activation Devices: Provide activation devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard, for condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal traffic load operation. Coordinate activation control with electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation switches are standard SPST, with optional DPDT availability. J. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series. 2.4 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1" LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Metal Protection Plates: ANSIBHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following. a. Stainless Steel: 300 series, 050 -inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bums Manufacturing (BU). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.5 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSIBHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bums Manufacturing (BU). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSIBHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non -handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). 2.6 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non -corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL -10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Sound -Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RS). 3. Zero International (ZE). 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.8 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSIBHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSUDHI A115 -W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perfouu a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Schedule, for hardware sets. C. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. RF - Rixson 4. RO - Rockwood 5. SA - Sargent 6. AD - Adams Rite 7. NO - Norton 8. 00 - Other 9. SU - Securitron DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Hardware Schedule Set: 1.0 Doors: 101A, 1O1B, 101C, 115, 136B, 141A, 141B 1 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLF-HD1 SER12 PE 1 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLF-HD1 PE 1 Exit Device 16 43 56 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Exit Device 16 43 AD8410 US32D SA 2 Pull RM202 US32D RO 1 Door Closer 1431 CPS EN SA 1 Door Operator 6070 689 NO 1 Threshold 2005AV PE 2 Activating Door Switch 505 NO 1 Power Supply BPS -24-3 SU Notes: -Weather seals to be provided by door manufacturer -Provide necessary drop plates and fillers for proper installation of door closers -Exterior doors and hardware to comply with FBC windstorm requirements. Set: 2.0 Doors: 111A, 136, 137 2 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLF-HD1 PE 1 Exit Device 16 43 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 Exit Device 16 43 AD8410 US32D SA 2 Pull RM202 US32D RO 2 Door Closer 1431 CPS EN SA 1 Threshold 2005AV PE Notes: -Weather seals to be provided by door manufacturer -Provide necessary drop plates and fillers for proper installation of door closers -Exterior doors and hardware to comply with FBC windstorm requirements. Set: 3.0 Doors: 208 1 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLF-HD1 SER12 PE 1 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLF-HD1 PE 1 Exit Device 16 43 56 AD8410 106 US32D SA DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1 Exit Device 16 43 AD8410 US32D SA 2 Pull RM202 US32D RO 2 Door Closer 1431 UO EN SA 2 Door Stop 442 or 409 as required US26D / RO US32D 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C306P MK 1 Card Reader 4301 SA 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK I Power Supply AQD6 SU Notes: -Weather seals to be provided by door manufacturer -Provide necessary drop plates and fillers for proper installation of door closers -Operation: presenting valid credential to reader temporarily retracts latchbolt, permitting entry. Outside trim is fail secure with key override. Inside pushbar always permits egress. Set: 4.0 Doors: 1311, 131G, 131H, 135B, 219, 220 1 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLF-HDI PE 1 Exit Device 16 43 AD8410 US32D SA 1 Pull RM202 US32D RO 1 Door Closer 1431 CPS EN SA 1 Threshold 2005AV PE Notes: -Weather seals to be provided by door manufacturer -Provide necessary drop plates and fillers for proper installation of door closers -Exterior doors and hardware to comply with FBC windstorm requirements. Set: 5.0 Doors: 141 F, 141G 2 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLF-HD1 PE 2 Exit Device 43 HC4 8710 US32D SA 2 Door Closer 1431 CPS EN SA 2 Kick Plate K1050 8" x2"LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2005AV PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Gasketing 303CS head & jambs PE 2 Sweep 315CN door width PE 2 Astragal 303CS PE DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 19 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Notes: -Exterior doors and hardware to comply with FBC windstorm requirements. Set: 6.0 Doors: 142B 6 Hinge (heavy weight) 1 Surface Bolt 1 Storeroom Lock 2 Surface Overhead Stop 2 Door Closer 2 Kick Plate 1 Threshold 1 Rain Guard 1 Gasketing 2 Sweep T4A3386 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 988 8251 LNL 9-X36 1431 CPSH K1050 8" x 2"LDW CSK 2005AV 346C 303CS head & jambs 315CN door width Notes: -Exterior doors and hardware to comply with FBC windstorm requirements. Set: 7.0 Doors: 124, 142A, 145 6 Hinge 1 Dust Proof Strike 2 Flush Bolt 1 Storeroom Lock 1 Door Closer 2 Kick Plate 2 Door Stop 2 Silencer Set: 8.0 Doors: 111B, 112A, 112B, 125, 135A 2 Continuous Hinge 1 Exit Device 1 Exit Device 2 Door Closer 2 Door Stop DOOR HARDWARE TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 570 555 8204 LNL 1431 UO K1050 8" x 2"LDW CSK 442 or 409 as required 608 CFM83SLF-HD1 16 43 AD8410 106 16 43 AD8410 1431 PS 442 or 409 as required US32D MK Bright SA Zinc US26D SA 630 RF EN SA US32D RO PE PE PE PE US26D US26D US26D US26D EN US32D US26D / US32D MK RO RO SA SA RO RO RO PE US32D SA US32D SA EN SA US26D / RO 087100 - 20 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS US32D Notes: -Provide necessary drop plates and fillers for proper installation of door closers Set: 9.0 Doors: 131A, 131B, 131C, 143B 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device 43 8813 ETL US32D SA 1 Door Closer 1431 P10 EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2"LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 10.0 Doors: 143A 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Exit Device 43 8813 ETL US32D SA 1 Door Closer 1431 PS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2"LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 11.0 Doors: 102, 109, 134 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Door Closer 1431 UO EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2"LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 442 or 409 as required US26D / RO US32D 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 12.0 Doors: 106, 107 3 Hinge 1 Privacy Set TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 49 8265 LNL US26D MK US26D SA DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 21 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1 Door Closer 1431 UO EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2"LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 4" x 1"LDW US32D RO 1 Door Stop 442 or 409 as required US26D / RO US32D 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 13.0 Doors: 127, 129 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Push Plate 70C US32D RO 1 Pull RM301 US32D RO 1 Door Closer 1431 UO EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x 2"LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 4" x 1"LDW US32D RO 1 Door Stop 442 or 409 as required US26D / RO US32D 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 14.0 Doors: 122 1 Continuous Hinge CFM83SLF-HD1 PE 1 Mortise Lock 2190 x Lever US32D AD 1 Cylinder 4066 628 AD 1 Cylinder 41 US26D SA 1 Door Closer 1431 UO EN SA 1 Door Stop 442 or 409 as required US26D / RO US32D Notes: -Provide necessary drop plates and fillers for proper installation of door closers Set: 15.0 Doors: 112E, 131K, 131L 10 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Flush Bolt 555 36" US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 22 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNL US26D SA 2 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 652 RF 2 Silencer 608 RO Set: 16.0 Doors: 113, 114-A, 119, 123, 126, 128, 132, 133, 140 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Door Stop 442 or 409 as required US26D / RO US32D 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 17.0 Doors: 108, 114 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNL US26D SA 1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 652 RF 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 18.0 Doors: 116, 117, 118, 120 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Office Lock 8205 LNL US26D SA 1 Door Stop 442 or 409 as required US26D / RO US32D 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 19.0 Doors: 144A 3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock 8237 LNL US26D SA 1 Door Stop 442 or 409 as required US26D / RO US32D 3 Silencer 608 RO Set: 20.0 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 23 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Doors: 101D, 1O1F, 101G, 110,:, 144B Hardware furnished by door manufacturer 00 END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 24 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Assembly Testing: Provide impact -resistant glazing that has been tested and accepted by authorities having jurisdiction as part of the door, window, storefront and curtainwall assemblies being used for the Project. C. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short -duration load. 3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass -framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint -preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Decorative Translucent Glazing Film: Provide samples for initial selection on 4 -inch square clear monolithic vision glass. D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 12 -inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Delegated -Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. G. Qualification Data: For installers, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency. H. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36 -month period. J. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. K. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Decorative Glazing Film Installer Qualifications: A qualified window film installer who can demonstrate record of satisfactory installations of window film for at least 5 projects in the preceding six months. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass, coated float glass and laminated glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from nonnal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 y56ears from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Basis -of -Design Glass Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in glass schedules or comparable product by one of the following: 1. AGC Glass Cona,: an i North Ainenea 2. 3. 4. Industries. ss. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5. Dluhak Corporation. 6. Gardner Glass Products Inc. 7. Eseneral Glass International. 8. Glass eri<s L ,Iuc. 9. EIIaz-Tech Industries. 10. Guardian Industries Corp. 11. Hartung Glass Industries. 12. Northwestern Industries, Inc. 13. Oldcastle f3uilcJingFnvelopc. 14. Pilkington North America Inc. 15. PPG Industries Inc. 16. Saint-Gobain Corporation. 17. Schott North. America Inc. 18. Tecnowlass S. A. 19. Tru lite Glass & Alum] numSolutions. 20. Viracon.Inc. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. 1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain reflective -coated glass from single source from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. E. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat -strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat- treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. F. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic -protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for the wind zone designated for the project when tested according to ASTM E 1886 or provide exterior glazing that passes Miami -Dade TAS 201, 202 and 203 or AAMA 506 referenced therein. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Large -Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. G. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For laminated -glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. U -Factors: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality -Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. FabricationProcess: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). B. Glass for Exterior, Windows and Storefront windows: 1 inch insulated glass, gray tint, low -e coating (Basis of Design: Sungate 500 Gray) 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral -skinned EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure -glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, coatings, interlayers of laminated -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Black. B. Glazing Sealants for Exterior Doors, Windows and Storefronts: Provide glazing sealants identical to those in assemblies tested for impact -resistance. C. Glazing Sealant for Interior Doors, Windows and Storefronts: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 890. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. 2.5 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and comers. 2.8 MONOLITHIC -GLASS TYPES Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Primary usage: All interior and exterior glass where not otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 6.0 mm minimum. 3. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass with decorative translucent glazing film 1. Primary usage: Interior glass where indicated as "frosted" or similar terms. 2. Thickness: 6.0 mm minimum. 3. Provide safety glazing labeling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings notfirmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than fmal compressed thickness of tape. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant if required by approved assembly. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure - glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and. backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 12 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 09111 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). E. Z -Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated -metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- (1.59 -mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- (1.21 -mm-) diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. C. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.053 -inch (1.34 -mm) uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single -Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. F. Z -Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 2. Except at exterior comers, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond comer; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior comers, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered C. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold -resistant core and paper surfaces. (Concessions walls and ceilings and Restrooms ceilings). 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. b. L -Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. U -Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 -by -10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 4. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting -type, sandable topping compound. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; [AC -20 FTR] [AIS -919]. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation." F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- (6.4- to 9.5 -mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 4. Abuse -Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face -layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance - rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws if required for fire -resistance rating, otherwise fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners. A. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. B. Curved Surfaces: 1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12 -inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. For double -layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Fasten with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L -Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U -Bead: Use where indicated. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 3: Behind mirrors. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. GYPSUM BOARD 092900-7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Waterproof membrane. 4. Crack isolation membrane. 5. Tile backing panels. 6. Metal edge strips. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and fmish required. 2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6 -inch (150 -mm) lengths. 1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation, 4' x 4' section. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation, 4' x 4' section. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. TILING 093000-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE PRODUCTS A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard. C. Low -Emitting Materials: Tile flooring systems shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Depaihnent of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." Tile Type: Factory -mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Daltile b. Ceramic Techniques c. Trinity Tile 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Refer to Finish Material List. 3. Composition: Porcelain. 4. Module Size: 1" x 1". 5. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). 6. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 7. Surface: Smooth without abrasive admixture. 8. Tile, Color and Pattern: Refer to finish material list. 9. Grout Color: Refer to finish material list. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: E. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Daltile b. Ceramic Technics c. Trinity Tile 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Refer to finish material list. 3. Module Size: 8" x 20". TILING 093000-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8mm). 5. Face: Plan with cushion edges.. 6. Finish: Bright, opaque. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: Refer to finish material list. 8. Grout Color: Refer to finish material list. 9. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 10. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's standard white silicone rubber. 11. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable[ and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile]. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: F. Tile Type: Porcelain Planks. 1. Manufacturers: Refer to fmish materials list. 2. Basis of Design: No alternates accepted. 3. Modual Size: 5-7/8" x 47-1/4". 4. Thickness: 10,0. 5. Coefficient of Friction: Ansi A 137.1 - 2012 - Dry 0.79. 6. Trims: Provide skirting piece at base - 2-15/16" x 47-1/4". 7. Grout: Refer to finish materials list. 2.2 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed fmish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium -grained white stone with gray veining. 2. Description: Match Architect's sample. 2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements or comparable product by one of the following: a. C -Cure; C -Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. TILING 093000-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). B. Fiber -Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirement, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement Underlayment b. James Hardie; Hardiebacker 500. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). C. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Board with Water -Resistant Coating: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia- Pacific Gypsum LLC; "DensShield Tile Backer" or a comparable product by another manufacturer. 2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 3. Long Edges: Square. 2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product selected from the following that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. B. Chlorinated -Polyethylene -Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030 -inch. (0,76 -mm) nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS. C. PVC Sheet: Two layers of PVC sheet heat -fused together and to facings of nonwoven polyester; 0.040 -inch (1.01-0m) nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Compotite Corporation; Composeal Gold. D. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008 -inch (0.203 - mm) nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the folowing: a. Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI E. Fabric -Reinforced, Modified -Bituminous Sheet: Self -adhering, SBS -modified -bituminous sheet with woven reinforcement facing; 0.040 -inch (1.01 -mm) nominal thickness. TILING 093000-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. National Applied Construction Products, Inc.; Strataflex. F. Fabric -Reinforced, Fluid -Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Boiardi Products, a QEP company; Elastiment 344 Reinforced Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane. b. Bonsai American, an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane with Glass Fabric. c. Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Blacktop 90210. d. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti -Fracture Membrane. e. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. f. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG with MAPEI Fiberglass Mesh. g. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Hydro -Guard 2000. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000. G. Fluid -Applied Membrane: Liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Boiardi Products, a QEP company; Elastiment 644 Membrane Waterproofing System. b. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane. c. Bostik, Inc: Durabond Duraguard Membrane. d. C -Cure; Pro -Red Waterproofing Membrane 63. e. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. f. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. g. Laticrete International, Inc: Laticrete Watertight Floor N' Wall Waterproofing. h. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing. j. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane. 2.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. B. Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail -shaped corrugations and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 3/16 -inch (4 -mm) nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: TILING 093000-5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA. C. Fluid -Applied Membrane: Liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane. b. C -Cure; CureLastic 949. c. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. d. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. e. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Fracture -Guard 5000. f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing. g. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane. 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. B. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsai American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C -Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. k. _LC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. C. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C -Cure. e. Custom Building Products. TILING 093000-6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 1. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Prepackaged, dry -mortar mix to which only water must be added 3. Prepackaged, dry -mortar mix combined with liquid -latex additive. 4. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water -Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on drawings. a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. b. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. d. Bostik, Inc. e. C -Cure. f. Custom Building Products. g. Jamo Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corporation. j. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 1. Summitville Tiles, Inc. m. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. B. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets. 2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Retain first subparagraph below if required for LEED-NC, or LEED-CI, or LEED- CS Credit IEQ 4.1. 1. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." B. One -Part, Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated with TILING 093000-7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant. b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. c. GE Silicones, a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L -shape, stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed -edge material. C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bonsai American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Silox 8. c. C -Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer. e. Jamo Inc.; Penetrating Sealer. f. MAPEI Corporation; KER, 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL -15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. i. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA -256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile -setting materials including curing compounds and other substances TILING 093000-8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin -set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile -setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field -Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Exterior tile floors. b. Tile floors in wet areas. c. Tile swimming pool decks. d. Tile floors in laundries. e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. f. Tile floors composed of rib -backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. TILING 093000-9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile per manufacturer's recommended grout joint widths. G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). J. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated.. K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout -sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. L. Install cementitious backer units and fiber -cement underlayment and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.[ Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.] M. Install glass -mat, water-resistant backing board with water-resistant coating and glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum panel and treat joints according to current Tile Council of North America (TCNA) "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. O. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. END OF SECTION 093000 TILING 093000-10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 093060 - FLOORING ADHESIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flooring adhesives. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09651 - Resilient Tile Flooring. B. Section 09653 - Resilient Base and Accessories 1.3 REFERENCES A. Carpet and Rug Institute, Indoor Air Quality Adhesive Testing Program. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's technical information for each product specified. C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's printed instructions for each product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products meeting the Carpet and Rug Institute's low VOC emission criteria achieved through the Indoor Air Quality Adhesive Testing Program. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes. B. Deliver and store materials in heated area on site at least 24 hours before commencement of work. C. Provide heated and dry storage facilities on site. FLOORING ADHESIVES 09306-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to materials from carbonation (carbon dioxide build-up). C. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standards or manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MAPEI Americas, which is located at: 1144 E. Newport Center Dr. ; Deerfield Beach, FL 33442; Toll Free Tel: 800-42-MAPEI; Tel: 954-246-8888; Fax: 954-246-8801; Email: request info (MGranatowski(amapei.com); Web: www.mapei.com/US-EN B. Acceptable Manufacturer: MAPEI Americas, which is located at: 1144 E. Newport Center D Deerfield Beach, FL 33442; Toll Free Tel: 800-42-MAPEI; Tel: 954-246-8888; Fax: 954-246-8801; Email: request info (MGranatowski(&,mapei.com); Web: www.mapei.com/US-EN C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. D. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Solvent -Free Cove Base Adhesives: 1. Product: Ultrabond ECO 575; solvent -free high performance acrylic cove base adhesive, meeting CRI low VOC emission criteria as manufactured by MAPEI. B. Solvent -Free Resilient Tile and Sheet Goods Adhesives: 1. Product: Ultrabond ECO 711; solvent -free clear thin spread adhesive for vinyl composition tiles, meeting CRI low VOC emission criteria as manufactured by MAPEI. 2. Product: Ultrabond ECO 300; solvent -free universal floor covering adhesive as manufactured by MAPEL 3. Product: Ultrabond ECO 350; solvent -free, high tack universal floor covering adhesive as manufactured by MAPEI. FLOORING ADHESIVES 09306-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions. B. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been properly prepared and deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions. 1. Supporting surfaces shall be structurally sound, dry, solid, stable, level, plumb and true to a tolerance in plane of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3.1 m). Level substrates using materials recommended by adhesive manufacturer based on depth of surface defects requiring patching and toppings. 2. Supporting surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, oil, grease, paint, tar, wax, curing compounds, sealers, form release agents, primers, free alkali, loosely bonded toppings, loose particles, old adhesive residues and substances that may prevent or reduce adhesion. 3. Mechanically sand scarify the substrate to completely remove all paint, loosely bonded toppings, loose particles, old adhesive residues and substances that may reduce or prevent adhesion, except do not sand or remove any existing resilient floors or cutback adhesive that may contain asbestos fibers or crystalline silica. 4. Turn off forced ventilation and floor heating systems prior to installation and protect work against drafts during installation and for a period of at least 48 hours after completion to prevent damage to substrates, installation products and flooring materials. Use indirect auxiliary heaters to maintain the temperature in the area at the recommended workable level. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent carbonation. 5. Comply with adhesive manufacturer's additional requirements for each type of substrate. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's printed instructions, and flooring manufacturer's additional requirements including the following: 1. Do not cover expansion joints with adhesive. 2. Check periodically by lifting material to ensure proper adhesive transfer to the backing. 3. Roll flooring surface backward across width and length with manufacturer's recommended roller, to break down adhesive ridges and to ensure removal of entrapped air. FLOORING ADHESIVES 09306-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. After installation, promptly remove adhesive smudges residue with water while adhesive is still fresh and with mineral spirits when dried. Test mineral spirits on flooring to ensure no damage or deterioration of luster will occur. 5. Restrict traffic for a minimum of 24 hours to allow proper adhesive set-up. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect from freezing, immersion in water, adverse temperature conditions and construction traffic in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's and flooring manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 09306 FLOORING ADHESIVES 09306-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 09 51 23 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast -in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3. Ceiling -mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access tiles, and special moldings. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory -applied color finishes. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed fmish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Tile: Set of 6 -inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 -inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. E. Qualification Data: For testing agency. F. Field quality -control test reports. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical tile ceiling. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling and components and anchor and fastener type. I. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical tile ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire -Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical tiles with the following surface - burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation. 1.8 COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical tiles and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tiles: Full-size tiles equal to 3.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 3.0 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold -Down Clips: Equal to 3.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram -positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong; Ultima Open Plan 1942"Tegular" or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Armstrong B. Classification: Provide tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated small holes and lightly textured). C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.85. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. NRC: Not less than 0.70. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members. H. Thickness: Minimum 3/4 inch. I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based. 2.3 Acoustical Cloud Units A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide; Sound Scapes Shapes, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Armstrong B. Acoustical Cloud: 1. Surface Texture: Smooth 2. Composition: Fiberglass 3. Surface fmish: DuraBrite acoustically transparent membrane on front and edges 4. Color: Shell 5. Shapes: a. Nominal 4 foot x 4 foot shape 1) Hexagon 6. Thickness 7/8 inch 7. Edge Detail: Square edge 8. Flames Spread: ATSM E 84, Class A 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High -Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high -humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design loadindicatedin ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 5 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion or bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. 2. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135 -inch -diameter wire. E. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04 -inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16 -inch- diameter bolts. G. Hold -Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. H. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact -clip system designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical tiles. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong; Silhouette XL 9/16" Bolt Slot —'A" Reveal, or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. BPB USA. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc. B. All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot -dipped galvanized as per ASTM A653. Main beams and cross tees are double -web steel construction with 9/16 IN type exposed ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 6 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre -finished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. BPB USA. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Fry Reglet Corporation. 5. Gordon, Inc. 6. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay -in tiles with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of file and flange at exposed suspension member. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. C. Extruded -Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded -aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the following: 1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 3. Baked -Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid -chromate -fluoride -phosphate conversion coating; organic coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, primer/topcoat system with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.8 to 1.2 mils. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 7 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro -Series SC -175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; BA -98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical tile ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tile s to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 8 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power -actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8; Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter comers accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical tiles with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut tiles at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For reveal -edged tiles on suspension system runners, install tiles with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 2. Paint cut edges of tile remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed tile surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical tile manufacturer. 3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by tile manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 9 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections and prepare reports: 1. Suspended ceiling system. 2. Hangers, anchors and fasteners. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements. 1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no tiles have been installed. a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 power -actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension. b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency. D. Remove and replace acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 10 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS END OF SECTION 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 51 23 - 11 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 095450 - ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions -1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal ceiling panels. 2. Exposed grid suspension system. 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, wall angle moldings and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 51 00 (09510) - Acoustical Ceilings 2. Section 09 20 00 (09250) - Plaster and Gypsum Board 3. Divisions 23 (15) - HVAC 4. Division 26 (16) Sections - Electrical Work C. Alternates 1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products which have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation. 2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, includ- ing but not neccessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Factory Mutual classified acoustical performance, panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; suspension system component profiles and sizes; compliance with the referenced standards. ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 09545-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 2. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot- Dip Process. 3. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. 4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverbera- tion Room Method. 5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Sys- tems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. 7. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Mate- rials. 8. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. 9. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceil- ings Systems. 10. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 11. ASTM E 1477 Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating -Sphere Reflectometers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of ceiling unit and suspension system required. B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions as referenced in Part 3, Installation. C. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees. D. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of ceilings. Show locations of items which are to be coordi- nated with, or supported by the ceilings. ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 09545-2 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards.For acous- tical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory clas- sification of NRC, CAC and AC. F. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have a Factory Mutual classifi- cation of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send mate- rial from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved la- boratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with com- plying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide ceiling panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store the ceiling panels in a dry, interior location and keep in cartons prior to installation to avoid damage B. Exercise care in moving and opening cartons to prevent damage to the panel face. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS Space Enclosure: 1. HumiGuard Plus Ceilings: Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris. Products with HumiGuard Plus performance and hot -dipped galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel suspension systems can be installed up to 120°F (49°C) and in spaces before the building is enclosed, where HVAC systems are cycled or not op- erating. Cannot be used in exterior applications where standing water is present or where moisture will come in direct contact with the ceiling. ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 09545-3 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.8 WARRANTY A. Ceiling Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1. Ceiling Panels: Sagging and warping 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects B. Warranty Period: 1. Ceiling panels: One (1) years from date of substantial completion. 2. Grid: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion. C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other pro- visions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other war- ranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with ap- propriate labels. 1. Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed. Z. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Ceiling Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.2.0 METAL CEILINGS PANELS A. Ceiling Panels Type (ACT -2): 1. Surface Texture: Smooth 2. Composition: Electrogalvanized Steel - .021 inches with Wood Look finish ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 09545-4 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY JULY 25, 2014 INTERGENERATIONAL RECREATION CENTER 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Color: Effects Maple (FXMP) 4. Size: 24in X 24in 5. Edge Profile: #6464 Square Tegular 6. Perforation: (M3) Extra Microperforated 7. Accessories: 1" fiberglass infill bag #8200100, 2'x2'xl" black gloss 8. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton, 0.70. 9. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL) 10. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 0.85. 11. Acceptable Product: MetalWorks Tegular - #6464M3FXMP, as manufactured by Arm- strong World Industries. 2.3.0 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel (galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel) as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double -web steel construction with 24 MM type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel (aluminum or stainless steel) in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching (excep- tion: extruded aluminum or stainless steel). 1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 HD. 2. Acceptable Product: Suprafine XL 9/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Color: Tech Black B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre -stretched, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner. PART 3 - EXECUTION ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS 09545-5